Tektronix 453A Instruction Manual
Read Online
Read the Tektronix 453A Instruction Manual online using the built-in PDF viewer.
Text of the manual
1 ΝSTRUCT I0Ν
'
ΜΑΝUAL
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
Se r ial
Number
Tektro n ix, Inc . 0
Ρ .Ο . Box 500
0
Beaverto n , Oregon 97005
"
Phone : 644-0161
"
Cables
: Tektronix
070-1089-00
171
ΑΙΙ Tektronix Jnstruments are
: warranted against .
defective materials and workmanship for one year.
Any
'
. questions w ith
respect, to
the - warranty,
mentioned above, shou ld- pe 'taken up with your
Tektronix Field' Engineer or representative.
All
requests
for
repairq and
. replacement parts
should be directed to the Tektronix Fie ld Office or
representative in Your area_ This procedure will assu re
you' the fastest possible 'service. Please
include the
i nstrument Type
(πr Part Numbery and
Serial
or
Model Number with all requests for parts or Se rvice :
Specifications and price change privileges reserved .
Copyright © 1971 by Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton,
Oregon . Printed in the United States of America. All
rights reserved . Contents of this publication may not
be reproduced
i n any form without permission of th e
copyright owner.
U.S.A. :and foreign Tekt ronix products covered
y U .S . and foreign patents, and/or patents pending .
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SE CTION
1
453Α/R453A SPECI FICATIONS
Page
SECTION 2
OPERATING I NSTRU CTIONS (cont)
Introd uction
1-1
I nput Cou pling
2-17
Table 1-1 E lectrical
1-1
Deflection Factor
2-17
V ertical Deflection System
1-1
D ual-Trace Operation
2-17
Triggeri ng (Α and Β Sweep)
1-3
Channel 1 Output and Cascaded
Horizontal Deflection System
1-4
Operation
2-18
Calibrator
1-6
Algebraic Addition
2-19
Ζ Axis Input
1-7
Trigger Source
2-19
Outpu t Signals
1-7
Trigger Coup ling
2-20
Display
1-8
Trigger Slope
2-21
Power Supply
1-8
Trigger Level
2-21
Table 1-2 Environmental Characteristics
1-9
H igh-F requency Stability
2-21
Table 1-3 Physical
1-9
Α Swee p Triggered Light
2-21
Standard Accessories
1-10
Α Swee p Mode
2-21
Horizontal Sweep Rate
2-23
Swee p Magnificatio n
2-23
Mixed and Delayed Sweep
2-24
Χ-Υ Operation
2-27
SECTION 2
OPERATING
I NSTRUCTIO NS
Α and Β Gate
2-27
Intensity Modulation
2-27
Calibrator
2-27
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
General
2_1
Front Cover
2_7
App lications
Operating Voltage
2_1
General
2-20
Operating Temperature
2-2
Peak to Peak Voltage
Operating Position
2-2
Measureme nts-AC
2-28
Rackmoun ting
2-2
I nstantaneous Voltage
Controls and Connectors
2-3
Measurements-DC
2-29
First-Time Operation
2-7
Comparison Measurements
2-30
Test Set-up Chart
2-11
Time-D u ration Measurements
2-31
General Operating Information
Determining F requency
2-32
Simp lified Operating
I nformation
2-11
R isetime Measureme nts
2-32
I ntensity Control
2-14
Time-Difference Measurements
2-33
Astigmatism Adjustment
2-14
Delayed Sweep Time Measurements
2-34
Graticule
2-14
Delayed Sweep Magnification
2-35
Trace Alignment Adjustment
2-15
Light F ilter
2_15
Displayed Complex Signals
Beam F inder
2-15
Using Delayed Sweep
2-36
Vertical Chann el Selection
2-15
Pulse Jitter Measurements
2-37
Vertical Gain Adjustment
2-15
Delayed Trigger Generator
2-38
Step Attenuator Balance
2-16
Normal Trigger Generator
2-39
Signal Connections
2-16
Mu lti-Trace Phase Difference
Loading Effect of the
Measurements
2-39
Type 453Α/R453A
2-16
H igh Resol ution Phase Measurements
2-40
Coaxial Cable Considerations
2-16
Χ-Υ PhaseMeasurements
2-40
Ground Consideratio ns
2-17
Commo n-Mode Rejection
2-42
SECTIO N 3
CI R CUIT DESCR IPTION
SECTION 5
CAL I BRATION
Introduction
3-1
Introduction
5-1
Block Diag ram
3-1
Tektro n ix
Field Service
5-1
Circ u it Operation
3-3
Using Th is Procedure
5-1
Chann el 1 Vertical Preamp
3-4
Test Eq uipmen t Requ ired
5-1
Chann el 2 Vertical Preamp
3-6
Prelimi nary Control Settings
5-3
Vertical Switching
3-7
Part 1-Pe rformance Chec k
Vertical Output Amp lifier
3-9
Introductio n
5-4
Trigger Preamp
3-10
Index to Part
Ι -Performance Chec k
5-4
Α Trigger Generator
3-12
Α Sweep Generato r
3-16
Prelimi nary Procedure for
Performance Check
5-5
Β Trigge r Ge nerator
3-19
Β Sweep Generator
3-21
Part I[-Adjustment
Horizon tal Amplifier
3-23
Introduction
5-26
'
2 Axis Amplifier
3-2ς
Index to Part II-Adjustment
5-26
CRT Circu it
3-27
Preliminary Procedure for
Low-Voltage Power Supp ly
3-28
Adjustme n t
5-26
Voltage Distrib ution
3-31
Calibrator
3-31
SE CTION 6
RACKMOUNTING
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE
I
ntroduction
6-1
Instrument Dimensions
6-1
Introduction
4-1
Rack Dimensions
6-1
Cover Removal
4-1
Slide-Out Tracks
6-1
Mounting Procedure
6-1
Preventive Maintenance
Alternative Rear Mounting Methods
6-2
General
4-1
Removing or
Installing the Instrumen t
6-3
Slide-Ou t Track Lubrication
6-3
Cleaning
4-1
Lu brication
4-2
Visual Inspection
4-2
Transistor Chec ks
4-2
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL PA RTS LIST
Recalibration
4-2
-
Abbreviatio ns and Symbols
Troubleshooting
Parts Ord ering Informatio n
Introduction
4-2
Index of Electrical Parts List
Troubleshooting Aids
4-2
Electrical Parts List
Troub leshooting Equ ipment
4-4
Troub les hooting Techn iques
4-4
Corrective Mainte nance
SE CTION 8
DIAGRAMS AN D CI RCUIT BOAR D
General
4-7
ILLUSTRATIONS
Obtaining Replacement Parts
4-7
Soldering Techniques
4-7
Symbols and Reference Designators
8-1
Com ponent Replacement
4-10
Voltage and Waveform Test Cond itio n s
8-2
Recalibratio n After Repair
4-13
Diagrams
Instrument Repackaging
4-13
Circu it Board
Illustrations
ι
ME CHAN ICA L PARTS L IST
CH ANG E INFORMATION
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
CO NTENTS (con t)
453Α/R453A
Mec han ical Parts List
I nformation
Abbreviations and symbols used
in
th is manu al are based on or
Index of Mec hanical Parts
List
taken directly from IEEE
Standard 260 "Standard Symbols for
and
Ill ustration s
Units",
MIL-STD-12B
and
ot her
standard s
of
the
electronics
industry . Change
information ,
if any,
is
located
at the rear of
Mec han ical Parts List
th is manual .
Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
453Α/R 453A
Introduct i on
switch set to Χ -Y) . The regulated DC power supplies main-
The Tektronix
453Α
Oscilloscope
is
α
transistorized
tain constant output over α wide variation of line voltages
portable oscilloscope designed to operate in α wide range of
and
frequencies . Total power consum ption of the
instru-
environmental conditions . The
light weight
of the 453Α
ment is approximately 90 watts .
allows it to be easily transported, wh ile providing th e per-
formance necessary for accurate h igh -frequency measu re
ments . The dual-channel DC-to-60 MH z vertical system pro-
Information given
in th is instruction manual applies to
vides cali brated d eflection factors from 5 millivolts to 10
the
R453A
also
unless
otherwise
noted . T he R453A
is
volts/division . Channels
1
and 2 can be cascaded using an
electrically
identical
to
the 453Α ,
but
is mec hanically
external cable to provide
α one millivolt minimum deflec-
adapted
for mounting
in
α standard
19-inc h rack . Rack -
tion factor ( both VOLTS/DIV switch es set to 5 mV ) .
Mounting
in structions and α d imensional drawing for the
R453A are provid ed in Section 6 of th is manual .
The trigger circuits provide stable triggering over th e full
range of vertical frequency response . Separate trigger con-
trols are provided to select the desired triggeri ng for the Α
and Β sweeps . One of th ree sweep modes can be selected
T h is instrument will meet the electrical characteristics
for the Α sweep; automatic, normal, or single sweep. The
listed in Table
1-1 following com plete calibration as given
horizontal sweep
provides α maximum swee p rate of 0 .1
in Section 5 . The performance check procedure
in Section
microsecond/division
(10 nanoseconds/d ivision usi ng 10Χ
5 provides α convenient method of check ing instrument
magnifier) along with α delayed sweep feature for accurate
performa nce
without mak ing
internal
checks or
ad just-
relative-time
measurements .
Accurate Χ -Υ
measurements
ments . T he following electrical characteristics apply over α
can be mad e with Channel 2 provid ing the vertical deflec-
calibration
interval of 1000 hours and an ambient temper-
tion,
and C hannel
1
provid ing
the horizontal deflection
ature range of 0°C to +50°C, except as otherwise ind icated .
( ΙΝΤ T R IG switch set to C H 1 O R Χ-Y, HOR IZ DISPLAY
Warmu p time for given accuracy is 20 minutes .
Deflection F actor
Deflection Accuracy
Variable Deflection Factor
Ι Continuously
variable
between
cali-
Ι Extend s maximum deflection factor to
brated
settings .
at least 25 volts/d ivision .
TABLE
1-1
ELECT R ICAL
Characteristic
Performance Requirement
Su pplemental Information
VER TICA L DEFLECTIO N SYSTEM
5 millivolts/ division
to
10 volts/divi-
Selected by VO LTS/DIV switch .
sion
in
11
calibrated step s for each
Ste
ps in 1-2-5 sequence .
ch annel . Less
than one millivolt/divi-
sion when Channel
1
and
2 are
cas-
cad ed.
Wit h in
3%
of
indicated
deflection .
With
GAI N
correctly
adjusted
at
20
Cascaded
deflectio n
factor
uncali-
mV
and VA R VO LTS/DI V control
set
brated .
to
calibrated .
Bandwid th at -3 dB points (with or
without Ρ6061 Probe)
20 mV to 10 VOLTS/DIV
Channels 1 and 2 cascaded
AC
Low-Frequency
Response (lower
-3 d B
point)
With Ρ6061 Probe
In p ut
RC
Characteristics
Resistance
Maximum
Safe
Input
Voltage
Input Cou pling M odes
Vertical Display M odes
Chopped Repetition Rate
Amp lifier Crosstalk
Common Mode Rejection Ratio
(all deflection factors)
Polarity Inversion
Signal Delay L ine
DC to at least 60 megahertz
DC to at least 50 megahertz
DC to at least 40 megahertz
DC to at least 25 megahertz
1 .6
hertz
or
less
at
all
deflection
factors .
0.16
hertz
or
less
at
all
deflection
factors .
AC or DC .
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance Requirement
Channel
1 only
.
Channel 2 only
.
Dual-trace, alternate between channels .
Dual-trace, chopped between channels.
Added algebraically .
Approximately 500 kilohertz .
100 :1 or greater, DC to 20 megahertz .
At
least 20 :1 DC to one kilohertz for
signals
less
than
eight
times
the
VOLTS/DIV switch setting .
Disp layed
signal from Channel 2 can
be inverted .
Permits
viewing
of
lead ing
edge
of
triggering
signal
(internal
triggering
only) .
Supplemental Information
Driven
from
25-ohm
source . VAR
VOLTS/DIV
control
set
to
calibrated
position .
In put Coupling switch set to AC .
One megohm
±2%
App roximately 20 picofarads
600 volts DC + peak AC (one kilohertz
or less) .
Selected by
Input Coupling switch .
H F REJ
DC
E xternal Trigger Sensitivity
AC
LF
REJ
HF
REJ
DC
Characteristic
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance Req uirement
Supplemental Information
TR IGGER I NG
(Α AN D Β SWEEP)
Internal
from
d isp layed channel
or
Selected by SO URC E switch .
from C hannel 1 only .
Internal from AC power source .
External .
External divide by 10 .
AC
AC low-frequency reject
AC high-frequency re j ect
DC
Sweep can be triggered from positive-
Selected
by SLO PE
switch
going
or
negative-going
portion
of
trigger
signal .
0.3 d ivision of deflection, minimum,
30 hertz to 10 megahertz ; increasing
to 1 .5 division at 60 megahertz .
0.3 d ivision of deflection, minimum,
30
kilohertz
to
10
megahertz ;
in-
creasing
to
1 .5 division
at 60 mega-
hertz .
0.3 d ivision of deflection, minimum,
30 hertz to 50 kilohertz .
0.3 d ivision
of deflection, minimum,
DC to 10 megahertz ; increasing to 1 .5
d ivision at 60 megahertz .
50 millivolts, minimum, 30 hertz to 10
SOUR CE
switch
set to EXT . Triggering
megahertz ; increasing to 200 millivolts
signal
requ irements
increase d
10
times
at 60 megahertz .
for ΕΧΤ -
10 position .
50
millivolts, minimum, 30 kilohertz
to
10 megahertz ;
increasing
to
200
millivolts at 60 megahertz .
50
millivolts, minimum, 30 hertz to
50
kilo h ertz
.
50
millivolts,
minimum,
DC
to
10
mega h ertz ; increasing to 200 millivolts
at 60 megah ertz .
Specification-453Α/R453A
Selected by CO UPL I N G switch .
(Α sweep only)
Single Sweep (Α Sweep only)
Display Jitter
External
Trigger
Input
R C Characteristics
Characteristic
LEVEL control range
ΕΧΤ
ΕΧΤ = 10
Maximum safe inpu t voltage
Sweep Rates
Α sweep
(delaying sweep )
Β sweep
(delayed sweep)
Sweep Accuracy
Over center eigh t d ivisions
5 s/DI V to 0.1 s/DI V
50 ms/DIV to 0.1 μ s/DI V
Sweep Linearity
Over any two division portion with-
in cente r eight divisions
(all sweep
rates)
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance R equirement
Stab le d isp lay
presented
with
signal
amp litudes
given under Internal
and
External Trigger Sensitivity above 20
hertz . Presents
α
free-ru nning sweep
for lower freq uencies or in absence of
trigger signal .
Α Sweep Generator p roduces only one
sweep when triggered . Further swee ps
are
locked
out until RES ET
bu tton
is pressed . Trigger sensitivity same as
given for
internal
and
external
sen-
sitivity .
One nanosecond or
less at 10 nano-
second s/d iv ision
sweep
rate
( MAG
switch
set
to Χ 10) .
HO R IZO NTAL D EFLECTIO N SYSTEM
Α and Β Sweep Generator
Performance Requi rement
0°C to +40°C
Ι
-150C to +55°C
Unmagnified
Ι Magnifie d
I Unmagn ified
I
Magnifie d
With in 3%
Ι W ithin 4°/ο
1 W ithin 5°/ο
Ι
W ithin 6%
With in 3%
Ι With in 4%
1 W ithin 4%
With in 5°/ο
Ι W ith in 5°/ο
Ι W ithin 5%
Supplemental Information
One megohm paralleled by 20 picofara ds
(approximate) .
At least + and - 2 volts .
At least + and - 20 volts .
600 volts DC + peak AC (one k ilohertz
or less)
0 .1 microsecond/d ivision to 5 seconds/
Ι Selected by Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch. Steps in
d ivision in 24 calibrated steps.
1-2-5 sequence .
0 .1
microsecond/d ivision
to 0.5
sec-
Ι Selected by Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . Step s in
and/d ivision
in
21
calibrated
ste
ps
1-2-5 sequence .
W ithin 5%
W ithin 10%
Ο
Variable Sweep Rate
Α Sweep Length
M ixed Sweep Accu racy
Calibrated Delay R ange
Delay Accuracy Over Center
E ight Divisions
5sto0 .1 s/DI V
50 ms to 1 μs/DIV
Incremental Mu ltiplier L inearity
Delay Time J itter
Accuracy
R esistance
Capacitance
Characteristic
Inpu t to CH
1
or Χ
connector
Deflection F actor
Χ B andwidth at Upper -3 d B
Point
Input R C Characteristics
Phase difference between Χ
and Υ amplifiers
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Specificatio n-453Α/R453A
Performance Requirement
I
Supplemental Information
Continuously
variab le between
cali-
E xtends maxim u m Α sweep
rate to
at
brated
sweep
rates .
least 12.5 seconds/d ivision and Β sweep
~ rate to at least 1 .25 seconds/division .
Variable
from
four divisions
or
less
Ι Measured
at
1
ms/DIV.
to
10 divisions or greater .
Mixed and
Delayed Sweep
W ith in 2°/ο ± measured Α sweep error
Exclud e
first 0.5 division
of displayed
when viewing
th e Α portion only . Β
sweep
and
0.2 d ivision
or 0.1
micro-
portion
accuracy
is
same
as stated
second, wh ichever
is greater, after tran-
u nder Sweep Accuracy .
isition from Α to Β sweep.
Continuous
from
50 seconds to 0.2
Selected by DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I E R
microsecon ds .
( d ial and Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch .
0°C to +40° C
Ι -15 0C to +55° C
W ith in 1 .5% of in-
W ithin 3.5% of in-
d icated delay
Ι d icated delay
W ithin 1 .5%ο of in-
W ithin 2°/ο of in-
d icated delay
d icated delay
W ithin 0.2%
Ι W ithin 0.3%
Less
th an
1
part
in
20,000 of
the
maximum
availab le
delay
time
(10
times Α
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch
setting) .
External Horizontal Amplifier
5
millivolts/division
to
10
volts/
ΙΙΝΤ TR IG switch set to CH
1 O R Χ-Y .
division in 11 cali brated steps .
Steps in 1-2-5 sequence .
0° C to +40 °C
-15 °C to +55°C
External
horizontal
gain
correctly
ad-
With in
5°/ο
of
in- Within
8°/ο
of
in-
Dusted
at 20
mV.
d icated deflection
d icated deflection
F ive megahertz or greater
3° or less at 50 k ilohertz
1 megohm ±2°/ο
Approximately 20 picofara ds
In pu t to ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ
I NPUT
Connector
Deflection Factor
Χ Bandwidth at Upper -3 d B
point
Input RC Characteristics
Phase difference between
Χ and Υ amp lifiers
Maximu m Safe Input Voltage
Waveshape
Polarity
Outpu t Voltage
Outpu t Current
Repetition
Rate
Ι One kilohertz .
Accu racy
Voltage
Cu rrent
Repetition
Rate
Risetime
Outpu t
Resistance
Characteristic
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance R equ irement
Β SOUR CE switch in ΕΧΤ ; 270 milli-
volts/d ivision ±15% .
Β
SO UR C E
switch
in
ΕΧΤ -
10;
2.7 volts/d ivision ±20% .
F ive megahertz or greater
3 ° or less at 50 kilohertz
Squ are wave
Positive going .
CAL IBRATOR
0 .1 volt or
1 volt, peak to peak
Five
milliamperes
throu gh PROBE
LOOP
on
side panel
0°C
to
+40°C
-150C
to +55 °C
±1%
±1 .5%
±0.5%
Ι
±1°/α
One
microsecond
or
less
Supplemental Information
One megohm parallele d by 20 picofarads
(approximate)
600 volts DC + peak AC (one
kilohertz
or less) .
Baseline at zero volts .
Selected by CAL I BR ATO R switch .
Approximately
200
ohms
in
1
V
position
Approximately
20
ohms
in
0 .1
V
position
Usable Frequency Range
I nput Resistance at DC
Input Co u pling
Maximum Inpu t Voltage
Α and Β Gate
Waveshape
Amplit ude
Polarity
Duration
Outpu t Resistance
Characteristic
Vertical
Signal Out (CH
1 only)
Outpu t V oltage
Bandwidth
Outpu t coupling
Output resistance
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance Requirement
Su pplemental Information
Ζ AXIS
I NPU T
Five volt peak-to-peak signal produces
noticeable
modulation
at
normal
intensity .
Positive-going
input
signal
decreases
trace
intensity ;
negative-going
input
signal
increases
trace
intensity .
DC to 50 megahertz or greater .
DC cou pled
Rectangular pulse
Positive-going
OUT PUT SIG NALS
Approximately
12
volts
peak
Same duration as respective sweep.
25 millivolts or greater, for each divi-
Into one megoh m load. ΙΝΤ T R IG switch
sion of CRT display .
I
set
to NO RM .
DC to 25 mega hertz or greater when
cascaded with Channel
2, or into 50-
oh m load .
DC coup led
Approximately 47 kilohms
200 volts DC + peak AC
Specification-453Α/R453A
Baseline at about -0.7 volt
A pproximately
1 .5 kilohms .
Approximately 50 ohms .
L i ne Voltage
Line F requency
230-volts nominal
Characteristic
Voltage Ranges (AC, RMS)
115-volts nominal
Maximum Power Consumption
Internal
TABLE 1-1 (cont)
Performance Requirement
Supplemental Information
DISPLAY
E ight divisions vertical by 10 divisions
horizontal . Each d ivision
equals
0 .8
centimeter .
Variable edge ligh ti ng .
Ρ31
standard .
Others available
on
special
order .
L imits display
within
graticule
area
when pressed.
115 volts nominal or 230 volts nominal .
I N ominal
line voltage and voltage range
selected by L ine Voltage Selector . Given
voltages apply wh en line voltage contains
2°/ο or less harmonic d istortion .
90 to 110 volts
104 to 126 volts
112 to 136 volts
180 to 220 volts
208 to 252 volts
224 to 272 volts
POWER SUPPLY
48 to 62 hertz
92 watts, one ampere at 60 hertz, 115-
volt
line
ENV I RONMENTA L CHARACTER ISTICS
Characteristic
I
Performance
NO ΤΕ
Condu cted in
This instrument will meet the electrical characteristics
terference
given in Table
1-1 over the following environmental
limits.
Complete details on environmental test pro-
cedures,
including failure
criteria,
etc ., can be ob-
tained
from
Tektronix,
Inc .
Contact
your
local
Tektronix Field Office or representative .
Transportation
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Altitude
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Operating and
storage
Vibration
Operating and
non-operating
Shock
O perating and
non-operating
E lectro-magnetic
Interference (EMI)
as tested in Μ Ι L- Ι -
6181D (when
equ ipped with
M OD
163D only)
Radiated
inter-
ference
-150C to +550C
-550C to +75°C
15,000 feet maximum . Maximum
operati ng tem perature decreases by
1 °C
per
1000
feet
increase
in
amplitude above 5000 feet .
Tested to 50,000 feet
F ive cycles (120 h ou rs) to 95% rela-
tive humidity
referenced to MIL-
E-16400F .
15 minutes along each of the th ree
major axes at α total displacement
of 0.025-i nch peak to peak (4 g at
55 Hz) with frequency varied from
10-55-10 Hz in one-min ute cycles .
H ol d at 55 H z for th ree minutes on
each axis .
Two shocks at 30 g, one-half sine,
11 millisecond duration each direc-
tion
along
eac h
ma j or
axis .
Gu illotine-type shocks . Total of 12
sh ocks .
Interference
rad iated from
the
in -
strument
under
test
with in
the
Cooling
F in ish
Characteristic
Overall Dimensions,
453Α (measured
at maxim u m points)
Height
Width
Length
Overall Dimensions,
R453A (measu red at
maximum points)
Height
Width
Length
Specification-453 Α/R453A
Performa nce
given limits from
150 k ilohertz to
1000 megah ertz (mesh filter instal-
led ) .
Interference conducted out of the
instru ment u nder test th rough th e
power cord within th e given limits
from
150
kilohertz
to 25
mega-
hertz
.
M eets N ational Safe Transit type of
test when packaged as shipped from
Tektronix, Inc .
TABLE 1-3
PH YSICAL
Information
Safe operating temperatu re main-
tained
b y
forced-air
cooling .
Automatic resetting thermal cutout
p rotects
instrument
from
over-
heating .
Anod ize d
aluminum
panel
and
chassis .
Blue vinyl-coated
cabinet .
7.2 inches (18 .3 centimeters)
12.6 inches (32 .0 centimeters)
20.7
inches (52 .6 centimeters)
in-
cluding
front
cover ;
22.4
inches
(56 .9
centimeters)
with
h and le
positioned for carrying .
7 .0 inches (17 .8 centimeters)
19 inches (48.3 centimeters)
17.4 inches (44.2 centimeters) be-
h ind front panel ; 19 .2 inches (48.8
centimeters) overall .
front cover with-
out accessories)
R453A (without
accessories)
Characteristic
Information
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Approximately
30
pounds
(13.6
Standard accessories sup plied with the 453Α and R453A
kilograms) .
are
listed
in
the Mechanical Parts L ist
illustrations . F or
App roximately 33.5 pounds (15 .2
optional accessories available for use with this instrument,
kilograms) .
see the current Tektronix, Inc . catalog .
Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
ι
ι
t
ι
ι
ι
General
To effectively u se the 453Α , the operation and capabil-
ities of the instrument must be known . This section de-
scribes the operation
of the front-,
side-, and rear-panel
controls and connectors, gives first time and general oper-
ating information, and lists some basic applications for this
instrument .
Front Cover
The
front cover furnished with
the 453Α provides α
dust-tight
seal around the front panel . Use the cover to
protect the front panel when stori ng or transporting the
instrument .
The
cover
also
provides
storage
space
for
probes and other accessories (see F ig . 2-1) .
Operating Voltage
CAUTION
This instrument
is designed
for operation from α
power
source
with
its
neutral
at
or
near
earth
(ground) potential with α separate safety-earth con-
ductor.
It is not intended
for operation from two
phases of α multi-phase system, or across the legs ofα
single-phase, three-wire system.
The 453Α can be operated from either α 115-volt or α
230-volt
nominal
line-voltage source . The
Line Voltage
Selector assembly on the rear panel converts the instrument
from
one operating range to the other .
In addition,
this
assembly changes the primary connections of the p ower
transformer to allow selection of one of three regulating
ranges . The assembly also inclu des the two line fuses . When
the
instrument
is converted
from
115-volt
to
230-volt
nominal operation, or vice versa, the assembly connects or
disconnects one of the fuses to provide the correct protec-
tion for the instrument . Use the following procedure
to
convert
this instrument between nominal
line voltages or
regulating ranges .
ι
Fig . 2-1 . Accessory storage provided in front cover .
NOΤΕ
Line
Black
Neutral
White
Safety earth (ground)
Green
453Α/R453A
3 .
To
convert
from
115-volts
nominal
to
230-volts
nominal
line voltage, pull out the Voltage Selector switch
bar (see Fig . 2-2) ; turn it around 180 ° and plug it back into
the remaining holes . Change the line-cord power plug to
match the power-source receptacle or use α 115- to 230-volt
adapter .
Color-coding of the cord conductors is as follows (in
accordance with National Electrical Code) :
1 . Disconnect the instrument from the power source .
4 . To change regulating ranges, pull out the Range Selec-
tor switch bar (see F ig . 2-2) ; slide it to the desired position
2 . Loosen the two captive screws which hold the cover
and p lug it back in . Select α range which is centered about
onto the voltage selector assembly ; then pull to remove the
the average line voltage to which
the instrument is to be
cover .
connected (see Table 2-1) .
Fig . 2-2 . Line Voltage Selector assembly on the rear panel (s hown
wit h cover removed ) .
TABLE 2-1
Regulating Ranges
Regu lating Range
Range Selector
115-Volts
230-Volts
Switch Position
N ominal
N ominal
The feet on
the rear panel provide
α convenient cord
wra p to store the power cord w hen not in use .
Operating Temperature
Th e 453Α
is cooled by
air drawn
in
at th e
rear and
blown out
throug h
holes
in
the
top and bottom covers .
Adequate clearance on the to p, bottom, and rear must be
p rovided
to
allow
h eat to be d issipated away from
th e
instru ment . The
clearance p rovided by
the feet
at
th e
bottom and rear sh ould be maintained .
If possible, allow
about one inch
of clearance on the top. Do not block or
restrict the air flow from the air-escape holes in the cabinet.
Α th ermal cutout
in
th is instrument provides thermal
protection and disconnects the power to
the instrument
if
the
internal
temperature
exceeds
α safe operating
level .
Power
is
automatically
restored when
the temperature
returns
to
α safe
level . Operation of
th e
instrument for
extended periods without the covers may cause it to over-
heat and the thermal cutout to open . The air filter shoul d
be cleaned occasionally to allow the maximum amount of
cooling
air to enter the instrument . Cleaning instructions
are given
in Section 4
.
Rackmounting
ι
connect th is instrument to α two-wire AC power system, be
,
sure
to connect
the ground lead of the adapter to earth
(ground) . F ailure to com plete the ground system may allow
the ch assis of th is instrument to be elevated above ground
potential and p ose α sh ock hazard .
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
LO (switc h bar in
90 to 110 volts
180 to 220 volts
left holes)
Μ (switch bar in
104 to 126 volts
208 to 252 volts
Th e
453Α
can be
operated
where
the
ambient
air
midd le holes)
tem peratu re is between -15°C and +55°C
. Derate the max-
ΗΙ (switch bar in
112 to 136 volts
224 to 272 volts
imu m operating temperature 1'C for each add itional 1000
righ t holes)
feet of altitude above 5000 feet . Th is instrument can be
stored
in
ambient
temperatu res
between
-55 °C
and
+75°C . After storage at tem perat u res beyond the operating
5 .
Re-install
th e
cover
and
tighten
the two
captive
limits,
allow
the
chassis tem perature to come within th e
screws .
operating limits before power is app lied .
6 . Before ap plying power to the instrument, check that
the
ind icating
tabs on
the
switch
bars are protru ding
Operating Posit i on
through the correct h oles for the desired nominal line volt-
The handle of the 453Α can be positioned for carrying
age and regu lating range .
or as α tilt-stand for the instrument . To position the handle,
press
in
at both pivot points (see rig . 2-3) and turn
the
handle to
the desired position . Several positions are pro-
vided for convenient carrying or viewing . The instrument
may
also be set on
the rear-panel
feet for operation or
This instrument may be damaged if operated with the
storage .
L ine
Voltage
Selector
assembly
set
to
incorrect
positions for the line voltage applied,
The 453Α
is designed
to be used with α three-wire - AC
Complete
information for mounting
the R453A
in α
power system .
If α three- to two-wire adapter
is used to
cabinet rack
is given
in Section 6 of th is manual .
2-2
Lion hαηλ1e .
Fig . 2-3 . Handle positioned to provide α stand for the instrument .
CONTRO LS AND CONNECTO RS
CH 1 O R Χ and
In
put connector for vertical signal .
General
CH 2 O R Υ
Α brief descri p tion of the function or operation of the
front-,
side-, and rear-panel controls and connectors follows
(see F ig . 2-4) . M ore detailed information
is given
in th is
section under General Operating Information .
Disp lay
I NTENSITY
Controls b rightness of disp lay .
A LT :
Dual trace d isplay of signal
on
bot h
c h annels .
Display
switched
between
channels
at
end of each sweep .
SCALE
I LLUM
Controls graticu le illumination .
CHOP : D u al trace display of signal
BEAM FI N D ER
Com presses disp lay with in graticu le
on
both
ch annels .
Display
area
independent of display posi-
switched between
channels at α
tion or app lied signals .
repetition
rate
of
about
500
kilohertz .
Vertical (both channels except as noted )
Provid es
adjustment
for
α
well-
defined d isp lay .
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
POSITIO N
Controlsvertical position of trace.
GAIN
Screwdriver adj ustment to
set gain
of the Vertical Preamp .
Input Cou pling
Selects m ethod of coupling
input
(AC GN D DC)
signal
to
V ertical
Deflection
System .
AC : DC component of input signal
is blocked . Low frequency limit
(-3 dB point) is abou t
1 .6 hertz .
GN D :
Input
circu it
is
grounded
(does not ground applied signal) .
DC : All components of
the input
signal
are passed to the Vertical
Deflection System .
STEP ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL
Screwd river
adjustment to balance
Vertical Deflection System in th e 5,
10,
and
20 mV positions
of
the
VO LTS/DI V switch .
MOD E
Selects vertical mode of operation .
CH
1 : The Channel
1
signal
is d is-
played .
CH 2 : The Channel 2 signal
is d is-
played .
ADD : Channel
1
and 2 signals are
VO LTS/DI V
Selects
vertical
deflection
factor
algebraically added and th e alge-
(VAR control must be in calibrated
braic sum
is
disp layed on
the
position
for
indicated
deflection
C RT .
factor) .
ΙΝΤ Τ R ΙG
Selects source of internal trigger sig-
VA R
Provides continuou sly variable de-
ηαΙ from
vertical
system . Also re-
flection
factor
between
the
cali-
lects
sou rce
of Χ
signal for Χ -Υ
brated settings of th e VOLTS/DI V
mode
operation .
switch.
NO RM :
Sweep
circuits
triggered
UN CAL
Light indicates that
the VA R con-
from disp layed channel(s) . C h an-
trol
in
not
in
the
calibrated
nel
1
signal available at C H
1
position .
O UT connector .
ι
2-3
Β Triggering and
CRT
External Horizontal
Channel l
Channel 2
Α Triggering
Α. Front panel
Β. Side panel
C. Rear panel
F ig . 2-4. F ront-, side-, and rear-panel controls and connectors .
INVERT (CH 2
Inverts
the Channel 2 signal when
only)
pulled out.
Groun d (not labeled )
Binding post to estab lis h common
ground between
the 453A and any
associated equipment .
Α and Β Triggering (both where applicable)
ΕΧΤ T R IG
I NPUT
'Input connector for external trigger
signal . Connector for Β Triggering
also serves as external horizontal in
put for the Χ
signal when HO R IZ
DISPLAY switch is in Χ -Υ position
and Β SOUR CE switch is
in ΕΧΤ
position .
SO UR C E
Selects source of trigger signal .
Ι NT :
Internal
trigger
signal
ob-
tained from Vertical Deflection
System . When CH
1
light is on,
trigger
signal
is obtained
only
from the Channel
1 in pu t signal ;
when the light is off, the trigger
signal
is obtained from
the dis-
p layed
channel(s) .
Source
of
internal
trigger signal
is selected
by the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch .
Α and Β Sweep
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
CH
1 OR Χ-Y : Sweep circuits trig-
the signal connected
to the CH
1
gered only from signal app lied to
OR
Χ
connector
(see ΙΝΤ TR IG
the Channel
1
input connector .
switch ) .
No signal available at CH
1 OUT
connector
. CH
1
ligh ts, located
CO
UPL ING
Determines
method
of
coupling
beside
Α
an d
Β
SO URCE
trigger signal to trigger circu it .
switches indicate when th e ΙΝΤ
TR IG switch is in the C H
1 OR
AC
: Re jects DC and attenuates sig-
Χ -Υ
position . For
Χ -Υ
mode
nals below about 30 hertz . Ac-
operation,
Channel
1
signal
is
cepts signals between about 30
connected
to
the H orizontal
h ertz and 60 mega h ertz,
Am plifier .
LF REJ : Re jects DC and attenuates
signals below about 30 kilohertz .
Accepts
signals
between
about
30 kilohertz an d 60 megahertz .
HF
REJ : Acce pts signals between
about 30 hertz an d 50 kilohertz ;
rejects DC and attenuates signals
outside the above range .
DC
: Accepts
all trigger signals from
DC to 60 megahertz or greater .
S LOPE
Selects
portion
of
trigger
signal
which starts the sweep .
+ :
Sweep
can
be
triggered
from
positive-going portion of trigger
signal .
- : Sweep can be
triggered from
negative-going portion of trigger
signal .
LEVEL
Selects am plitude point on trigger
signal
at wh ich sweep is triggered .
HF STAB
Decreases d isplay
jitter
for high
(A Triggering only)
frequency
signals .
H as
negligib le
effect at low sweep rates .
L I NE : Trigger signal obtained from
DELAY-TIME
Provides
variable
sweep delay be-
α
samp le
of
the
line
voltage
MULTI PL I ER
tween 0.20 and 10.20 times the de
app lied to th is instru ment .
lay time ind icated by
the Α TIME/
DI V switch .
ΕΧΤ : Trigger signal obtained from
an external signal applied to the
Α SWEEP TR IG'D
L ight indicates that Α sweep is trig
ΕΧΤ T R IG
I NPUT connector .
gered and will p roduce α stable dis-
play with correct
I NT ENSITY and
ΕΧΤ - 10 : Attenuates external trig-
POSITION control settings .
ger
signal
approximately
10
times .
UNCA L Α O R Β
L ight
indicates
that
either the Α
VA R or Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V VA R IA BLE
CH
1
Light
indicates
that
the
internal
control is not in the calibrated posi-
trigger signal
is obtai ned only from
tion .
2-5
Operating Instructions-453Α/ R453A
Α AND Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch
(clear plastic
determined by the setting of the
'
AND DELAY
flange) selects the sweep rate of the
DELAY TIME
(Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V )
TIME
Α sweep circuit for Α sweep only
switch
and
the DELAY-TIME
operation and selects the basic de-
MULTI PL I ER d ial . Sweep mode
lay
time
(to
be mu ltiplied
by
determined by Β SWEEP MOD E
DELAY-TIME
MULTI PL I ER
dial
switch.
setting) for mixed or delayed sweep
o p eration .
Β
ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
(D
E -
M IXED : Both time bases are oper-
'
LAY E D SWEEP)
switch
selects
ating. The sweep rate of the first
sweep rate of the Β sweep circu it
part of the sweep is determined
for mixed or d elayed sweep oper-
by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch ; the
ation only . Variable controls must
last part is determined by the Β
'
be
in calibrated positions for cali-
ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch . The amount
brated sweep rates.
of d isplay allocated to each time
base is determined by th e setting
Α VAR
Provides continuously
variable Α
of
the DELAY-TIME MULTI-
sweep rate between calibrated set-
PL I ER dial .
tings of the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch. Α
sweep rate is calibrated when con-
Χ-Y :
Horizontal
deflection
p ro-
trol
is set fully clockwise to cali-
vided by an external signal .
brated position .
MAG
Increases sweep rate to ten times
'
Β SWEEP MOD E
Selects Β sweep operation mode.
setting of Α or Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch
by horizontally expand ing the cen
TRIGGERABLE AFTER
D ELAY
ter division
of
the d isplay. Ligh t
TIME : Β sweep circu it will not
ind icates wh en magnifier is on,
produce α sweep until α trigger
pulse
is
received following the
Α SWEEP MOD E
Determin es the operating mode for
delay
time selected by the D E-
Α sweep .
LAY
TIME
(A
TIME/DIV)
switch
and
the DELAY-TIME
AUTO TR IG : Sweep
initiated by
MULTI PL I ER d ial.
the applied trigger signal at point
selected by the Α LEVEL con-
Β STARTS AFTER DELAY TIME :
trol when th e trigger signal repe-
Β
sweep
circuit
ru ns immedi-
tition
rate
is above about 20
ately following delay time selec-
hertz
and within the frequency
ted by th e DELAY TIME switch
range selected by the Α COUP-
an d
DELAY-TIME
MULTI-
LI NG
switch. Triggered
sweep
PL I ER d ial.
can be obtained only over the
amplitude range of the applied
HOR IZ DISPLAY
Selects h orizontal mode of opera-
signal . When th e Α LEVEL εοη-
tion .
trol
is
outside
the amplitude
range, the trigger repetition rate
Α: Horizontal deflection provided
is
below
the
lower
frequ ency
by Α sweep. Β sweep inopera-
limit (or above u pper limit for
tive .
HF REJ), or th e trigger signal is
inadequate,
the sweep free runs
Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β : Sweep rate
at the sweep rate selected by the
'
determined
by Α
ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to produce
switch. An
intensified portion
α bright reference trace.
appears on
the disp lay d uring
the Β sweep time . This position
NORM T R IG : Sweep initiated by
provides α chec k of th e duration
the applied trigger signal at point
an d
position
of
the
delayed
selected by Α LEVEL control
sweep
( Β ) with respect to the de-
over the frequency range selec-
laying sweep (Α) .
te
d by the Α COUPL I NG switch.
Triggered sweep can be obtained
Β (D ELAYED SWEEP) : Sweep rate
only over the amplitude range of
d etermined
by
Β
ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
th e applied trigger signal . Wh en
,
switch
after
the delay
time
the Α LEVEL control is outside
the amp litu de range, the trigger
to
obtain
α
well-defined
d isplay.
repetition rate
is outside the fre-
Does not require
re-adj ustment in
quency range selected by the Α
normal u se .
CO UPL I NG
switch , or the trig-
ger
signal
is inadequate,
there
is
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V -
Provid es
continuously
variable
Β
no trace .
VAR IABLE
sweep rate between calibrated set-
tings
of
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
switch .
Β
SI N G LE SWEEP : After α sweep is
sweep rate
is calibrated when con-
displayed, furth er sweeps cannot
trol
is set fully clockwise to CAL .
be presented
u ntil
the RES ET
button
is pressed . Display is trig-
PR O BE LOOP
Current loop provid ing five-milliam-
gered
as for NO RM
operation
pere square-wave current from cali-
using the Α Triggering controls .
brator circuit .
RES ET
When th e RES ET button
is p ressed
Α GATE
Output connector provid ing α
rec-
(SI NG LE
SWEEP mode),
α single
tangular pulse
coincident with Α
d isplay will be presented (with cor-
sweep.
rect triggering) wh en
the next trig-
ger pu lse
is received . RES ET
light
Β GATE
Ou tput connector providing α
rec-
(insid e RES ET bu tton) remains on
tangular
pulse coincident
with Β
until
α trigger
is received and
the
sweep.
sweep is com pleted . RESET button
must
be
pressed
before
anot h er
CH 1 OU T
Outp u t
connector
p roviding
α
sweep can be presented.
sam ple of the signal applied to the
CH
1 OR Χ connector when
the
Α SWEEP LENGTH
Adjusts length of Α sweep.
In
the
ΙΝΤ T R IG switch
is
in the N O RM
FULL position
(clockwise detent),
position .
the sweep
is
at
least
10 divisions
long .
As
the
control
is
rotated
CAL I BRATOR
Switch
selects
output
voltage
of
counterclockwise,
the length of Α
Calibrator
. 1-volt or 0.1-volt square
sweep is reduced until it is less than
wave available .
four divisions long ju st before
the
detent
in
the
fu lly-counterclock -
T R ACE ROTATION
Screwd river
adju stment
to
align
wise position
is reached .
In the Β
trace with horizontal graticule lines .
EN DS
Α
position
(counterclock -
wise detent), the Α sweep is reset at
Rear Panel
the end of the Β sweep to provide
the fastest possible sweep repetition
Ζ AXIS
I NPUT
Input con nector for intensity mod-
rate for delayed sweep disp lays .
u lation of th e CRT d isplay .
POSITIO N
Controls
horizontal
position
of
Line Voltage Selector
Switch ing
assem bly
to
select
the
trace.
nominal
operating voltage and the
line
voltage
range . The assembly
F I NE
Provides
more
precise horizontal
also inclu des the line fuses .
position adju stment.
Voltage
Selector :
Selects nominal
1 kH z
Calibrator ou tput connector .
operating voltage range (115 V
or 230 V) .
POWER ON
L ig h t :
In d icates
that
POWER
switch
is on and the instrument
Range Selector : Selects line voltage
is connected
to
α
line voltage
range (low, med ium, high ) .
source .
Switch :
Controls
power
to
the
instrument.
FIRST-TIME O PER ATIO N
Side Panel
The following steps will demonstrate the use of the con-
trols and connectors of the 453Α . It is recommended that
ASTIG
Screwdriver adju stment used in con-
th is procedure be followed com pletely
for familiarization
ju nction with
the FOC US control
with th is instrument .
2-7
Setu p Information
Display
2-8
1 . Set the controls as follows:
4 . Advance the
I NTENSITY control u ntil th e trace is at
the desired viewing level (near mid range) .
Display Controls
INTENSITY
Counterclockwise
F OCU S
Midrange
SCALE ILLUM
Counterclockwise
5. Connect the 1 kH z CAL connector to the CH 1 OR Χ
connector with α BN C cable.
ι
ι
ι
ι
6. Turn the Α LEVEL control toward 0 u ntil th e display
Vertical Controls ( both channels if applicable)
becomes stable . N ote that the Α SWEEP T R IG'D light is on
VOLTS/DIV
20mV
wh en the d isplay is stable .
VAR
Calibrated
POSITIO N
M id range
Input Coupling
DC
7
. Adj ust the FOCUS control for α sharp, well-defined
MODE
CH 1
disp lay over the entire trace length. (If focused d isp lay can-
ΙΝΤ TR IG
NORM
not
be obtained,
see Astigmatism Ad justment
in
th is
I NVER T
Pushed in
section .)
Triggering Controls (both Α and Β if applicable)
8. Disconnect the in put signal and move the trace with
LEVEL
Clockwise (+)
the Channel
1 POSITION control so it coincides with one
SLOPE
+
of the h orizontal graticule lines. If the trace is not parallel
CO UPLI NG
AC
with the graticule line, see Trace Alignment Adjustment in
th is section.
SOURCE
ΙΝΤ
Sweep Controls
9. Rotate the SCALE
I LLUM
control through out its
range and notice that the graticule lines are ill uminated as
'
DELAY-TIME
0.20
the control is turned clockwise (most obvious with mesh or
MULTI PL I ER
tinted
filter installed) . Set control so graticule lines are
Α and Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
.5 ms
illu minated as desired .
Α VAR
Calibrated
Β SWEEP MODE
Β STA RTS AFTER
DELAY TIME
Vertical
H OR IZ DISPLAY
Α
MAG
OFF
10 . Change the CH
1 V OLTS/DIV switch from 20 mV
,
POSITION
Midrange
to 5 mV . If the vertical position of the trace sh ifts, see Step
Α SWEEP LENGT H
FULL
Attenuator Balance in th is section.
Α SWEEP MODE
AUTO TR IG
POWER
OFF
11 . Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to 20 mV and set
the Channel
1
Input Cou pling switch to AC . Connect the 1
Side Panel Controls
kHz CA L connector to both the CH 1 OR Χ and CH 2 OR
Υ connectors with two BNC cables and α BNC Τ connector.
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
CAL
VAR IABLE
CA L I BR ATOR
.1 V
NOTE
If the BNC cables andBNC Τ connecto r are not avail-
2 . Connect the 453Α to α power source th at meets the
able, make the following changes in
the procedure.
voltage and frequency requirements of the instrument.
If
Place the BNC jack post (supplied accessory) on the 1
,
th e available line voltage
is outside the limits of the Line
kHz CA L connector and connect the two 10Χprobes
Voltage Selector assembly
(on rear panel), see Operating
(supplied accessories) to the CH 1 and CH 2 connec-
Voltage in th is section .
tors. Connect the probe tips to the BNC jack post.
'
Set the CALIBRATOR switch (on side-panel) to 1 V.
3. Set the POWER switch to ON . Allow about five min-
utes warmup so th e instrument reaches α normal o perating
12 . Turn the Channel 1 POSITION control to center the
'
temperature before proceed ing.
d isplay. The d isplay is α square wave, five d ivisions in amp li-
tu de with about five cycles disp layed on the screen . If the
22 . Set the MOD E switch to ADD . The d isp lay shou ld
display is not five divisions in am plitude, see Vertical Gain
be four divisions in am plitude . N ote th at either POSITIO N
Adjustment in th is section .
control moves the disp lay .
13 . Set
the Ch annel
1
Input Cou pling switch to G N D
23 .
Pull th e
I NVERT switch . The disp lay
is α
straight
and position th e trace to th e center horizontal line with the
line
indicating that the algebraic su m of the two sign als is
Channel
1 POSITIO N control . Th is provides α ground refer-
zero (if th e C hannel 1 and 2 gain is correct) .
ence at th e center horizontal line .
24 .
Set
either
VO LTS/DI V switch
to 20 m V . The
14 . Set
th e Channel
1
Input Cou pling switch to DC .
square-wave display indicates that the algebraic sum of the
Note that th e baseline of the waveform remains at the cen-
two signals
is no longer zero . Return the MOD E switch to
ter horizontal line (ground reference) .
C H
1
and both VO LTS/ΠΙ V switches to
.2 (if using 10Χ
probes, set both VO LTS/DI V switches to 20 mV)
. Push in
the I NVERT switch.
15 . Set th e Channel
1
Input Coup ling switch to AC .
Note that th e waveform
is centered about the center h ori
zontal line (ground reference) .
Triggering
25 . Set the CA L
I BR ATOR switch to
1 V . Rotate the Α
LEVEL control th rough ou t its range . The d isp lay free runs
16 . Tu rn
th e Channel
1 VA R
control
th roughout its
at
the
extremes
of
rotation . N ote
th at
the Α
SWEEP
range . N ote th at the UN CA L light comes on when the VA R
T R IG'D ligh t is on only wh en the d isplay is triggered.
control is moved from th e cali brated position (fu lly clock-
wise) . The deflection sh oul d be reduced to about two d ivi-
sions.
Return
the VA R control to th e calibrated position .
26 . Set the Α SWEEP MOD E switch to NO RM T R IG .
Again rotate th e Α LEVEL control throughou t its range . Α
d isp lay
is presented only when correctly triggered . T he Α
17 . Set th e MOD E switch to CH 2 .
SWEEP TR IG'D
ligh t operates as in A UTO TR IG . Retu rn
th e Α SWEEP MOD E switch to AUTO T R IG and set the Α
LEVEL control for α stable display .
18 . Tu rn
the Channel 2 POSITIO N control to center th e
display . The d isp lay will be similar to the previous display
for Channel
1 . Chec k Channel 2 step attenuator balance
27 . Set th e Α SLO PE switch to - . The trace starts on
and gain as described in steps 10 th rough 12 . The Channel 2
the negative part of the sq uare wave . Return
the switch to
Input Cou pling switch and VAR control operate
as de-
+ ; the trace starts with the positive part of the squ are wave.
scribed in steps 13 th rough 16 .
28 . Set th e Α CO UPL I N G switch to DC . Turn th e Ch an
19 . Set both VOLTS/DIV switches to 50 mV.
nel
1 POSITIO N control u ntil the d isplay becomes u nstable
(only part of square wave visible) . Return
the Α COUP-
LING switch to AC ; the disp lay is again stable . Since chang-
20 . Set the MOD E switch to A LT and position the Chan-
ing trace position ch anges DC
level, th is shows how DC
nel
1
waveform
to
the top of the graticule area and the
level changes affect DC trigger coupling . Return the d isp lay
Channel 2 waveform
to the bottom of the graticule area .
to the center of the screen .
Turn
the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch through out its range . N ote
that
the d isplay alternates between ch annels at all sweep
rates .
29 . Set the MOD E switch to CH 2 ; the display shou ld be
stable . Remove th e signal connected to Channel
1 ; th e dis-
play free runs . Set th e ΙΝΤ TR IG switch to NO RM ; th e
21 . Set the MODE switch to CHOP and the Α TIME/
display
is again stable . Note that the CH 1 ligh ts in Α and Β
DI V switch to 10 μ s . N ote the switch ing between ch annels
Triggering go out wh en
the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch is ch anged to
as
shown by th e segmented trace . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch
NO RM .
to CH
1 O R Χ-Y ; the trace sh ould appear more solid , since
it
is no longer triggered on th e between-ch annel switch ing
transients . Tu rn
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch th roughout its
30. Set the Α SOURC E switch to L I NE . Connect α 10Χ
range . Α dual-trace d isp lay
is presented at all sweep rates,
probe
(supp lied accessory)
to the CH 2 O R Υ connector
.
but unli ke A LT, both channels are disp layed on each trace
Connect the probe tip to α line-voltage sou rce and set the
on α time-sh aring basis . Return the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to
CH 2 VO LTS/DI V switch for α disp lay abou t four d ivisions
.5 ms .
in amplitude .
If necessary, adju st the Α LEVEL control for
Operating Instructions-453 Α /R453A
2-9
Ope rating Instructions-453Α/R453A
α stable d isp lay of
the sine-wave . Notice th at the display
intensified portion appears to jum p between positive slopes
starts on the correct slope . Disconnect th e probe .
of the d isp lay . Set the Β S LOPE switch to - ; the
intensified
portion begins on the negative slope . Rotate
the Β LEVEL
control ;
th e intensified portion of the display disappears
31 . Connect th e Calibrator signal to both th e CH 2 O R
w
hen th e Β LEVEL control is out of
the triggerable range .
Υ
and Α
ΕΧΤ T R IG
I NPUT
connectors.
Set
the Α
Return th e Β LEVEL control to 0 .
SOURCE
switch
to
EXT .
Operatio n
of
the
LEVEL,
S LOPE, and COUPLI NG controls for external triggering are
the same as described in steps 25 throu gh 28 .
39 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (DELAY E D
SWEEP) .
Rotate
the
D ELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial
throughout its range ; about one-half cycle of the waveform
32 . Set the Α SOURC E switch to ΕΧΤ - 10 . O peration
shou ld be displayed on the screen (lead ing edge visible only
is th e same as for EXT . N ote that the Α LEVEL control has
at h igh
INT ENSITY control setting) . The disp lay remains
less range
in this position,
ind icating trigger signal attenu-
stable on
th e screen, indicating that the Β sweep is trig-
ation . Return the Α SOUR CE switch to INT .
gered.
33 . Operation of the Β Triggering controls is similar to Α
40 .
Set
the
Β SWEEP MOD E
switch to
Β STA RTS
Triggering .
AFTER DELAY TIME . Rotate the DELAY-TIME MULTI-
PL I ER d ial th rough out its range ; the display moves contin-
uou sly across the screen as the cont rol is rotated.
Normal and Magnified Sweep
34 . Set
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to 5 ms and the MAG
41 . Rotate the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial fu lly
switch to Χ 10 . The d isp lay
should be similar to that ob-
counterclockwise a nd set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α
tained with the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch set to .5 ms and the
ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I NG Β . Rotate the Α SWEEP LENGTH εοη
MAG switch to OFF .
trol counterclockwise ; the length of the d isp lay decreases .
Set the control to the Β EN DS Α position ; now the disp lay
end s after
the
intensified portion .
Rotate
the DELAY-
35 . Turn
the horizontal POSITION control
throughout
TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial and note
that the sweep length
its range ; it shou ld be possible to position the display across
increases as the d isp lay moves across th e screen . Return the
the complete graticule area . Now turn th e F I NE control .
Α SWEEP LENGTH control to FULL .
The d isplay moves α smaller amount and allows more pre-
cise positioning . Retu rn the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to .5 ms,
the MAG switch to O FF and return the start of the trace to
42 . Turn
the
Β VA R IABLE control
(on
side panel)
the left graticule line .
th roughout its range . N otice that the UNCA L Α OR Β light
comes on when the Β VAR IABLE control is moved from
the CAL position
(fu lly clockwise) . The
Β
sweep
rate
36 . Turn
the Α VAR control
throughout
its range .
(intensified
portion)
is slower by about 2.5 times in the
N otice that the UN CAL Α OR Β light comes on wh en the Α
fully counterclockwise position,
as indicated by α longer
VAR control is moved from the cali brated position (fu lly
intensified zone . Return the Β VA R IABLE control to CAL.
clockwise) . The sweep rate is slower by about 2.5 times
i n
the fully countercloc kwise position
as ind icate d by more
cycles d isplayed on the CRT . Retu rn the Α VA R control to
43 . Set the HOR IZ DISPLAY switch to M IX E D and the
the calibrated position .
DELAY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER to 5.00 . N otice th at the first
half of th e sweep is at the sweep rate of the Α time base (5
ms/DI V), and the last half is at th e sweep rate of th e Β time
Delayed Sweep
base
(0.5
ms/DI V) .
Rotate
the DELAY-TIME MULTI-
37 . Pull the D ELAYED SWEEP knob out and tu rn it to
PLI ER dial th roughout its range and notice that the disp lay
switches between time bases at the point ind icated by
the
50 μ s (D ELAY TIME remains at .5 ms) . Set the HO R IZ
DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial . Retu rn the HO R IZ DIS-
DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β . An intensified
PLAY switch to Α .
portion, about one division
in length, should be shown at
the start of the trace . Rotate the DELAY-TIME MULTI-
PL I ER d ial
through out
its range ;
the intensified portion
Single Sweep
shou ld move along the d isplay .
44 . Set the Α SWEEP MOD E switch to SI N G LE SWEEP .
Remove the Cali brator signal from the C H 2 O R Υ connec
38 . Set the Β SWEEP MODE switch to TRIGGERABLE
tor . Press the RESET bu tton ; the RESET light should come
AFTER DELAY TIME . Again
rotate
the DELAY-TIME
on and remain on . Again apply th e signal to the CH 2 OR Υ
MULTI PL I ER dial
throughout its range and note
that th e
connector ;
α
single trace
sh oul d be p resented and
the
2-1 0
RESET light sh ould 9ο out. Return the Α SWEEP MOD E
can be demonstrated . Remove the grou nd strap between
switch to AUTO T R IG .
the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT bind ing posts . Connect the external
signal to both the CH 2 OR Υ connector and the Ζ AXIS
External Horizontal
I NPUT bind i ng posts . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch to dis-
play abou t five cycles of the waveform . T he positive peaks
45 . Connect the Calibrator signal to both the CH 2 OR
of the waveform should be blanked and the negative peaks
Υ and ΕΧΤ T R IG OR Χ
I NPUT connectors . Set the Β
intensifie d ,
ind icating
intensity modulation . Replace the
SOURC E switch to ΕΧΤ, Β COUPL ING switch to DC, and
ground strap .
the H OR IZ DISPLAY switch to Χ-Y . Increase the INTEN-
SITY control setting until the display
is visible (two d ots
displayed diagonally) . The display should be five divisions
53 . Th is completes the basic operating
vertically and about 3.7 divisions horizontally . Set the Β
procedure for
the 453Α . Instrument operations not explai ned here, or
SOUR CE switch to ΕΧΤ - 10 . The d isp lay should be re-
operations wh ich need
further explanation
are discussed
duced 10 times horizontally . The display can be positioned
un
der General Operating Information .
horizontally with the horizontal POSITIO N or F I NE con-
trol, and vertically with the Channel 2 POSITIO N control.
46 . Con nect the Calibrator signal to both the CH 1 OR
Χ and CH 2 OR Υ connectors . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to
CH 1 OR Χ-Υ and the Β SOUR CE switch to INT .
47 . The display should be five divisions vertically and
horizontally . The display can be positioned horizontally
with the Channel
1 POSITION control and vertically with
the Channel 2 POSITIO N control.
48 . Change the CH
1 VOLTS/DIV switch to
.5 . The
Simplified Operating Instructions
display
is reduced to two divisions h orizontally . Now set
General . The following information is provided to aid in
the CH 2 VOLTS/DI V switch to .5 . The d isp lay is reduced
quickly obtaining th e correct setting for the 453Α to pre
to two divisions vertically .
sent α display . The operator should be familiar with the
complete
function
and operation of the instrument as
Beam F inder
described in this section before using th is procedu re .
49 . Set the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switches to 10
mV. The display is not visible since it exceed s the scan area
Normal Sweep Display (Y -Τ Display)
of the C RT.
50 . Press the
BEAM F I NDER switch. Note that th e d is-
ρΙαγ
is returned to the graticule area . Wh ile holding the
BEAM F I NDER switch dep ressed , increase the vertical and
horizontal deflection factors until the display is reduced to
about two d ivisions vertically and h orizontally. Adjust the
Ch annel
1 and 2 POSITION controls to center
the display
about the center lines of the graticule. Release the BEAM
F I NDER and note th at the d isplay remains within the view-
ing area . Disconnect the app lied signal .
51 . R educe the
I NTENSITY control setting to normal, Β
SOURCE switch to ΙΝΤ, and set the HOR IZ DISPLAY
switch to Α.
Ζ-Axis Input
52 .
If an external signal
is available (five volts peak to
peak minimum) the function of the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT circu it
6. Connect the signal to the CH 1 OR Χ connector.
Operating I nstructions-453A/ R453A
TEST SET-UP CHART
Fig .
2-5
shows the front,
side, and rear panels of the
453Α. Th is chart can be reproduced and used as α test-setup
record for
special measurements, applications or p roce-
dures, or it may be used as α training aid for familiarization
with th is instrument.
G ENERAL OPERATING
I NFORMATIO N
1 . Set the INTEN SITY control fu lly counterclockwise .
2 . Set the Input Cou pling switch to AC, VAR VOLTS/
DIV control to
calibrated, and vertical MOD E switch to
CH 1 (use ALT or CHOP for dual-trace disp lay) .
3. Set the Α SWEEP MODE, Α S LOPE, Α CO UPLI N G,
and Α SOURC E switches to their up positions.
4 . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch to
1 ms/DIV, Α VAR
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V control to calibrated , and HOR IZ DISPLAY
switch to Α.
5. Set the POWER switch to ON . Allow several minutes
warmup .
2- 1 1
Operating Instructions-453Α/ R453A
2- 1 2
SERIAL
STEP
(((Πlll=ό`Ε
POSITION
AC
GND
DC
NORM
ΙΝΤ
C H 1
TRIG
TEKTRONIX
.
ΙΝ C
ΒΕΑνΕ R ΤυΝ. OREGON, υ τΑ
Β . Side panel
453ΑT EST SET-UP C HART
DELAY TIME MULTIPLIER
1-10
Εν
TRIG Ο
Ρ
Α AND
Β
ι ρ
ΤΙΜΕ /DIV
U OR
8
υ rv εη
CAL
AND DELAY TIME
50Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
5
( Ο
®
S .2 \
~~
/2
70
1
ΟΜ
D
Ο
INVERT
PULL
STEP Ο
ALT
L
Ν
Α. F ront panel
10
20/
4 DIV
Α SWEEP M ODE Θ ENDS Α~~~ FULL
AUTO
Π
TRIG
Α TRIGGERING
RE
ET
F ig . 2-5.
C . R ear panel
Β TRIGGERING Ι οΕισ,ΥΕ D SWEEP)
SLOPE
COUPLING
SOURCE
LEVEL
/Ο
CΗ 1
'_~
+
Ι AC
ιΝΤ
θ SWEEP MODE
ROGISERABLE
STARTS
HOR12 DISPLAY
Α ΙΝΤΕΝ
,~
50
DURINGG Θ
13
οευΥεο
Γ
POWER ΟΝ
S
ΕΜ TRIG
η
LF
LINE
INPUT
REJ
ΗΕ
XT
REJ
OC
Ε %Τ
Η 10
AFTER DΕΙΑ-4:~ AF
ΤΕ
R οΕΙΑν
TIME
TIME
υτε
α r ρισ
DURING
AND
SOURCE
ED 5 ΙΤΙΟΝΟ
.4
Β
L EVEL
SLOPE
COUPLING
SOURCE
LEVEL
_
UNCAL
CH 1 .- GN 2
10
5
Βω
Urvcαι
Θ
NORM
/
Ο
REDUCED
\
+
AC
ΙΝΤ
RΕου CED βΎ
ALT
TRIG
+
CH
1
AC
GND
DC
REJ
CHOP
on
SINGLE
LINE
Γ
ΕΜ TRIG
SWEEP
INPUT
ADD
C H
2
20
\
Α ,
,
( 5ωεΕR
0j?
7 . Advance
th e
I NTENSITY control
until
α d isplay
is
5 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (DELAYE D
visible
(if display
is not visible with the
I NTEN SITY con-
SWEEP) . Delayed sweep rate
is shown by the dot on the
trol
at mid range, press
the BEAM F I N D ER
switch and
DELAYED SWEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV ) knob.
ad just th e VO LTS/DI V switch until the d isp lay
is reduced
in size vertically ;
then center th e com pressed d isp lay with
the vertical and horizontal POSITION controls ; release the
6 . F or α delayed sweep display with less j itter, set the Β
BEAM FI N D ER) . Set th e FOC US control for α well-defined
S
WEEP MOD E switch to T RIGGER ABLE AFT ER DELAY
disp lay .
TIME,
all
Β
Triggering
switches
up,
and
adju st
the
Β
LEVEL control for α stable display .
8 . Set th e VO LTS/DI V switch and vertical POSITION
control for
α
display wh ich remains with in
the graticule
area vertically .
Mixed Sweep Display (Y-Τ Display)
9 . Set th e Α LEVEL control for α stable disp lay .
10 . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch and horizontal POSI-
TION control for α display wh ich remains within the grati-
cule area horizontally .
Magnified Sweep Display (Y-Τ Display)
1 . Follow steps 1 - 10 for N ormal Sweep Display .
2 . Adjust the horizontal POSITIO N control to move the
area to be magnified with in the center d ivision of the C R T .
If necessary, change the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch setting so the
comp lete area to be magnified is with in the center division .
3 . Set the MAG switch to Χ 10 and adjust the horizontal
F I NE control for precise positioning of the magnified dis-
play .
Delayed Sweep Display (Y -Τ Display)
1 . Follow steps 1 - 10 for N ormal Sweep Display .
Operating Instructions-453A/ R 453A
1 . F ollow steps 1 - 10 for Normal Sweep Disp lay .
2 .
Set
the
Β SWEEP MODE switch
to
Β STARTS
AFTER
DELAY
TIME,
HO RIZ
DISPLAY
switch
to
M IX E D, and Α SWEEP LENGTH to FULL .
3 . Pull out the D ELAYED SWEEP ( Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V ) switch
and turn clockwise to obtain the amount of magnification
desired.
4 . Adjust the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial to vary
the amount of delay time before th e start of the magnified
portion of the d isp lay .
5 . For mixed sweep d isp lay with less
j itter, set the Β
SWEEP MOD E switch to T R IGGER ABLE A FTER DELAY
TIME,
all
Β
Triggering switches
up, and
adjust
the
Β
LEVEL control for α stable d isplay .
Χ -Υ Display
1 . Set the
I NTENSITY control fully cou nterclockwise .
2 . Set both
In put Cou pling switches to AC and VA R
2 .
Set
the
Β
SWEEP MOD E
switch
to Β STA RTS
VOLTS/DIV controls to calibrated .
AFTER DELAY TIME, H O R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α
ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I NG Β , and the Α SWEEP LENGTH control to
FULL .
3 . Set
the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch to C H
1 OR Χ-Y, HOR IZ
DISPLAY switch to Χ-Y, Β SO URCE switch to ΙΝΤ , the
Vertical MODE
switch to C H
2, and th e Β COUPL I N G
3 . Pull out the D ELAY E D SWEEP
( Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V ) switch
switch to DC . Center th e horizontal POSITION control .
and turn clockwise so the intensified zone on the display is
the desired
length
(intensified zone will be displayed in
delayed form) . If an intensified zone
is not visible, change
4 . Set the POWER switch to ON . Allow several minutes
the
I NT ENSITY control setting .
warmu p.
4 . Adjust the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial to posi-
5 . Connect th e Χ
(horizontal) signal to
the CH 1 OR Χ
tion the intensified zone to the portion of the disp lay to be
connector and the Υ
(vertical)
signal
to the C H 2 O R Υ
delayed .
connector .
2- 1 3
6 . Advance the INTENSITY control until α d isp lay
is
2 . Set the TI ΜΕ/DIV switch to .2 ms .
visible
(if no display
is visible, press the BEAM F INDER
switch and adjust the CH
1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switches
until the display
is reduced in size both vertically and hori-
3 . With the FOCUS control and ASTIG adjustment set
zontally ; then center the comp ressed d isp lay with the CH
1
to midrange, adjust the INTENSITY control so the rising
and CH 2 POSITION controls ; release the BEAM F INDER) .
portion of the d isp lay can be seen .
Set the FOCUS control for α well-defined d isplay .
4 . Set the ASTIG adjustment so the horizontal and verti-
7 . Set the CH
1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switches and
cal
portions of the display are equally focused , but not
POSITION controls for α display which remains within the
necessarily well focused.
graticule area
(leave the horizontal POSITION control set
to midrange) . CH
1
controls affect h orizontal deflection
and CH 2 controls affect vertical deflection .
5 . Set the FOCUS control so the vertical portion of the
trace is as thin as possible .
Intensity Control
6 . Repeat steps 4 and 5 for best overall focus . M ake final
The setting of the INTENSITY control may affect the
check at normal intensity .
correct focus of the display . Slight re-adjustment of the
F OCUS control may be necessary when the intensity level
is changed. To protect the CRT phosphor, do not turn the
Graticule
I NTENSITY
control h igher than necessary to p rovide α
satisfactory
disp lay . The light filters reduce the observed
The graticule of the 453Α
is internally marked on the
light output from the CRT . When using these filters, avoid
facep late
of
the
CRT
to provide accurate,
no-parallax
advancing the INTENSITY control
to α setting that may
measurements . The graticule
is marked with eight vertical
burn
the phosphor . When the h ighest intensity d isp lay
is
and 10 h orizontal d ivisions . Each d ivision is 0.8 centimeter
desired, remove the filters and use only the clear faceplate
square . In addition, each major division is divided into five
protector . Apparent trace intensity can also be improved in
minor d ivisions at the center vertical and horizontal lines.
p
such cases by reducing the ambient light or u sing α viewing
The vertical gain and horizontal timing are calibrated to the
hood . Also, be careful that the INTENSITY control is not
graticule so accurate measurements can be made from the
set too high when changing the ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch from α
wCRmi
itT . The
ϊΙΙυ
Lοη
UM
of the
control .
lines can be varied
fast to α slow sweep rate, or when changing to the external
with
T .
SCAL
Ε
E
Ι
L
.
h orizontal mode of operation .
Astigmatism Adjustment
If
α well-defined d isp lay cannot be obtained with the
F OCUS control, adjust the ASTIG adjustment (side panel)
as follows .
NOΤΕ
To check for proper setting of the ASTIG adjust-
ment, slowly turn the FOCUS control through the
optimum setting.
If the ASTIG adjustment
is cor-
rectly set, the vertical and horizontal portions of the
display
will come into sharpest focus at the same
position of the FOCUS control . This setting of the
ASTIG adjustment should be correct for any display.
However,
it may be necessary to reset the FOCUS
control
slightly
when
the INTENSITY control
is
changed.
Fig . 2-6 shows the graticule of the 453Α and defines the
various measurement lines . The terminology defined here
First
Ninth
division
Center
division
vertical
vertical
vertical
line
line
line
1 . Connect α 1 V Calibrator signal to either channel and
set the VOLTS/DIV
switch of that channel to p resent α
two-division d isp lay . Set the MODE switch to display the
channel selected .
Fig . 2-6 . Definition of measurement lines on 453A graticule .
2- 1 4
Center
horizontal
line
will be used
in
all discussions involving graticule measure-
filter or clear facep late protector .
It can be ordered by
ments .
Tektronix Part No . 378-0573-00 .
I
Trace Align ment Adjustment
If α free-running trace
is not parallel
to the h orizontal
graticule lines, set th e T R AC E ROTATION ad justment as
follows . Position
the trace to
the center horizontal
line .
Adjust the TRACE ROTATION adjustment (side panel) so
th e trace is parallel with the horizontal graticule lines .
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
L ight F ilter
The tinted filter provided with the 453Α minimizes light
reflections from
th e face of the CRT to improve contrast
when viewing
the display under h igh ambient light con-
ditions . Α clear plastic faceplate protector is also provided
with th is instrument for use when neither the mesh nor th e
tinted
filter is u sed. The clea r faceplate protector provides
th e best d isp lay for waveform photographs . It is also pre-
ferable for viewing h igh writing rate disp lays . To remove
th e filter from th e C RT, press down at the bottom of th e
frame and pull
the top of the filter away from the C R T
faceplate (see F ig
. 2-7) .
An optional mesh filter
is available
for use with
th e
453Α
(standard with MOD
163D) . This
filter provides
shielding against
rad iated EMI
(electro-magnetic
interfer-
ence) from the face
of the CRT .
It also serves as α light
filter to ma ke th e trace more visible u nder h igh ambient
ligh t cond itions . The mesh filter fits in place of th e tinted
Fig . 2-7 . Removing the filter or faceplate protector .
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
Α filter or the faceplate protector shou ld be used at all
times to p rotect
the C RT faceplate from scratches . The
faceplate protector and th e tinted filter mount in the same
h older . To remove the
light
filter or faceplate p rotector
from
the holder, press
it out to th e rear . They can be re-
placed by snapp ing th em back into the holder .
Beam Finder
Th e BEAM F I ND ER provides α means of locating α dis-
play which over-scans
the viewing area either vertically or
h orizontally . When the BEAM F I N D ER switch is pressed ,
the d isplay
is com pressed with in
the graticule area . To
locate and
re-position
an
over-scanned display,
use
th e
following procedure :
1 . Press the BEAM F I N D ER switch .
2 . Wh ile th e BEAM F I NDER switch
is held depressed,
increase the vertical and horizontal deflection factors until
the vertical d eflection is reduced to about two d ivisions and
the horizontal deflection
is reduced to about four divisions
(the horizontal deflection need s to be reduced only when in
the Χ -Υ mode of operation) .
3 . Adjust the vertical and h orizontal POSITION controls
to center the disp lay about the vertical and horizontal cen-
ter lines .
4 .
Release
the
BEAM
F I NDER
switch;
the display
should remain with in the viewing area .
Vertical Ch annel Selection
E ith er of th e input channels can be used for single-trace
d isplays . Apply
the signal to the desired input connector
and set the M OD E switch to display the channel u sed . How-
ever, since CH
1
triggering is provided only
in Channel 1
and the invert featu re only in Channel 2, the correct ch an-
nel must be selected to take advantage of these features .
For dual-trace displays, connect the signals to both input
connectors and set the MODE switch to one of the dual-
trace positions .
Vertical Gain Adjustment
To ch eck th e gain of either channel, set the VO LTS/D I V
switch to 20 mV. Set the CA LI BR ATO R switch to
.1 V
and connect th e 1 kH z CAL connector to the input of the
channel used . The vertical deflection shou ld be exactly five
d ivisio ns .
If not, adjust the front-panel GAI N adju stment
for exactly five divisions of deflection .
2-1 5
adapters and the bayonet-ground tip provide the best fre-
quency response . Remember that α ground strap only α few
if
the gain of
the
two
channels must be closely
inch es
in
length can produce several percent of ringing
matched (such
as for ADD mode operation),
the
when operating at the h igher frequ ency limit of this system .
'
adjustment procedure given in the Calibration section
See you r Tektronix, Inc.
catalog for characteristics and
should be used.
com patibility of probes for use with this system .
The best measurement accuracy when using probes is
In h igh-frequency applications requiring maximum over-
provided
if the GAIN adjustment is made with the probes
all bandwidth, use coaxial cables terminated at both ends in
installed (set the CA L I BRATOR switch to 1 V) . Th is com-
their characteristic im pedance . See the d iscussion on coax-
pensates for any inaccu racies of the probes . Also, to pro-
ial cables in th is section for more information .
vide the most accurate measurements, calibrate the vertical
gain of the 453Α at th e temperature at which the measure-
ment is to be made.
H igh-level,
low-frequency
signals
can
be
connected
d irectly
to
the 453Α
i nput connectors with
sh ort un-
shielded leads. Th is cou pling method works best for signals
Ste p Attenuator Balance
below about one kilohertz and deflection factors above one
volt/division .
When
this
method
is
u sed,
establish
α
,
To chec k the step attenuator balance of either channel,
v
common ground between
the 453Α and
the equipment
set the
Input Coupling switch
to GND and set the Α
under test . Attempt to position the leads away from any
SWEEP MOD E switch to AUTO TR IG to provide α free-
source of interference to avoid errors
in
the disp lay .
If
running trace. Change the VOLTS/DIV switch from 20 mV
interference is excessive with unshielded leads, use α coaxial
'
to 5 mV .
If the trace moves vertically, adjust th e front-
cable or α probe.
panel ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL adjustment as follows (αΙΙοω at
least 10 minutes warmup before performing th is adjust-
ment) .
Loading Effect of the 453Α
As nearly
as possible, simu late actual operating con-
1 . W ith the Input Cou pling switch set to GND and the
ditions in th e equipment under test . Otherwise, the equ ip-
VOLTS/DIV switch set to 20 mV, move the trace to the
ment under test may not produce α normal signal . The
center h orizontal
line
of the graticule with the vertical
probes mentioned previously offer the least circuit load ing.
POSITIO N control .
See the probe instruction man ual for load ing characteristics
of individual probes .
2. Set the VOLTS/DIV switch to 5 mV and ad just the
STEP ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL ad justment to return the trace to the
When the signal
is coup led directly to the input of the
center horizontal line .
453Α , the input im pedance is about one megohm paralleled
by abou t 20 picofarads. When th e signal is cou pled to the
input th rough α coaxial cable, the effective in put capaci
3. Recheck step attenu ator balance and repeat adjust-
tance depends upon the type and length of cable used . See
ment until no trace shift occurs as the VOLTS/DIV switch
the following d iscussion for information on obtaining maxi-
is changed from 20 mV to 5 mV.
mum frequency response with coaxial cables .
Signal Connections
Coaxial Cable Considerations
In general, probes offer the most convenient means of
Th e signal cables used to connect the signal to the 453Α
connecting α signal to the in put of the 453Α . Tektronix
input connectors have α large effect on the accuracy of α
10Χ probes are also shielded to prevent pickup of electro-
displayed high-frequency waveform . To maintain the high-
static interference . Α 10Χ attenuator probe offers α high
freq uency characteristics of the app lied signal, h igh-quality
input impedance and allows the circuit under test to per-
low-loss coaxial cable sh ould be used. The ca ble sh ould be
form very close to normal operating cond itions . H owever, α
terminated at the 453Α input connector in its characteristic
10Χ probe also attenuates th e input signal 10 times. Tek-
im pedance .
If
it is necessary to use cables with differing
tronix F ield Effect Transistor probe systems are available
characteristic impedances, use su itable impedance-match ing
which of fer the same high-inpu t im pedance as the 10Χ
devices to provide the correct transition, with minimum
probes. However,
they are particularly u seful since they
loss, from one impedance to th e other .
provide wide-band operation while presenting low attenu-
ation and low input capacitance . To obtain maximum band-
wid th when using probes, observe the grounding consider-
T h e ch aracteristic im pedance, velocity of propagation,
ations given in the probe manual . T he probe-to-connector
and n ature of signal losses in α coaxial cable are determined
2- 1 6
by the physical and electrical characteristics of the cable .
nector
is
internally disconnected, bu t not grounded, and
Losses caused by energy dissipation
in the dielectric are
the inpu t circuit is held at grou nd potential .
proportional to th e signal frequency . Therefore, much of
the h igh-frequency information in α fast-rise pu lse can be
lost in only α few feet of interconnecting cable if it is not
The GND position can also be used to pre-charge the
the correct type. To be su re of the h igh -frequency response
cou pling capacitor to the average voltage level of the signal
of the system when using cables longer th an about five feet,
app lied to th e input connector. This allows measurement of
observe the transient response of the 453Α and the inter-
only the AC com ponent of signals having both AC and DC
connecting cable with α fast-rise pulse generator (generator
components. The pre-charging network incorporated in this
risetime less than 0.5 nanoseconds) .
unit allows the input-coup ling capacitor to charge to the
DC source voltage level when the I n put Coup ling switch is
set to GND . The procedure for using this feature
is as
Ground Considerations
follows :
R eliable
signal measureme nts cannot be made unless
both the oscillosco pe and th e unit under test are connected
together by α common reference (ground ) lead in add ition
to the signal
lead or probe . Although the three-wire AC
power cord provi des α common connection when used with
equi pment with similar power cords, th e ground loop pro-
d uced may make accurate measurements impossible . The
ground
stra ps su pplied with
the probes provide an ade-
q uate grou nd . The sh ield of α coaxial cable provides α com-
mon ground when connected between two coaxial connec-
tors
(or with
suitable
adapters
to provide α common
ground ) . When
using unsh ielded signal leads, α common
ground lead
should be connected from the 453Α chassis
to the chassis of the equipment under test
.
In put Coupling
The C h annel 1 and 2 Input Coupling switches allow α
choice of
input coupling meth ods. The type of d isplay
desired and th e applied signal will determine the coupling
to use.
Th e DC Coupli ng position can be u sed for most app lica-
tions . This position allows measurement of th e DC com-
ponent of α signal .
It must also be used to display signals
below abou t 16 hertz as they will be attenuated in the AC
position .
1 . Before connecting the signal containing α DC compo-
nent to the 453Α in put connector, set the
I nput Coupling
switch to GND . Then connect the signal to the input con-
nector .
2. Wait about one second for the coup ling capacitor to
charge .
3. Set the Input Coupling switch to AC . The trace (dis-
play) should remain on the screen so the AC component of
the signal can be measu red in the normal manner .
Deflection Factor
O perating Instructions-453Α/ R453A
The amount of vertical deflection produced by α signal is
determined by the signal amplitude, the attenuation factor
of
th e probe
(if used ), the setting of the VOLTS/DIV
switch, and the setting of the VAR VOLTS/DIV control .
The calibrated deflection factors indicated by the VOLTS/
DIV switches apply only when the VAR control is set to
the cali brated position (fully counterclockwise) .
The VAR VOLTS/DIV control provides variable (uncali-
brated) vertical deflection between the calibrated settings
of the VOLTS/DIV switch . The VAR control extends the
maximum vertical deflection factor of the 453Α to at least
25 volts/division (10 volts position) .
In the AC Cou pling position, th e DC component of the
signal
is blocked by α capacitor in the input circuit . The
Dual-Trace Operation
low-frequency response in the AC position
is about
1 .6
hertz (-3 dB point) . Therefore, some low-frequency atten-
Alternate Mode. The ALT position of the vertical M OD E
uation can be expected near th is freq uency limit. Attenu-
switch produces α d isplay wh ich alternates between Chan-
ation
in the form of waveform tilt will also appear in square
nel 1 and 2 with each sweep of the CRT . Although the ALT
waves wh ich
h ave low-frequency components . The AC
mode can be used at all sweep rates, the CHOP mode pro-
coupling position provides the best d isplay of signals with α
vides α more satisfactory display at sweep rates below about
DC com ponent wh ich
is much larger than the AC com po-
50
microsecon ds/division. At
these slower sweep
rates,
nent,
alternate mode switch ing becomes visually perceptible .
The GND position provides α grou nd reference at the
Proper
internal
triggering
in
the ALT mode can be
input of the 453Α without the need to externally ground
obtained in either the NORM or CH 1 OR Χ-Υ positions of
the input connectors. The signal applied to the input con-
the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch . When
in the NORM position, th e
2- 1 7
is triggered from the signal on each channel . Th is
provides α stable d isp lay of two u nrelated signals, but does
not ind icate the time relationsh ip between the signals. In
the CH
1 OR Χ-Υ position, the two signals are displayed
showing true time relationsh ip .
If the signals are not time
related, th e Channel 2 waveform will be u nstable in the CH
1 OR Χ-Υ position .
The following operating considerations and basic appli-
cations may suggest other uses for th is feature.
Chopped Mode. The CHOP position of
the MOD E
switch produces α disp lay which is electronically switched
between chan nels. In general, the CHOP mode provides the
1 .
If AC coup ling is desired , set the Channel
1
Input
best display
at sweep rates lower th an about 50 micro-
Cou pling switch to AC and leave the Ch annel 2 Input Coup-
secon d s/ d ivision,
or whenever
dual-trace,
single-shot
ling switch set to DC . When both Input Cou pling switches
phenomena are to be displayed . At faster sweep rates the
are set to DC, DC signal coupling is provided .
chopped
switching becomes apparent and may interfere
with the display .
Proper internal
triggering for the CHOP mode is pro-
vided with the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch set to CH 1 OR Χ-Y .
If
the N ORM position is used, the sweep circu its are triggered
from the between-channel switch ing signal and both wave-
forms
will
be unstable . External
triggering provides the
same result as CH 1 OR Χ-Υ triggering .
Two signals wh ich are time-related can be displayed
in
the chopped mode showing true time relationshi p .
If the
signals are not time-related ,
the Channel 2 display will
appear unstable . Two single-shot, transient, or random sig-
nals which occu r within the time interval determined by the
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch (10 times sweep rate) can be com pared
using the CHOP mode. To correctly trigger the sweep for
maximum resolution, the Ch annel 1 signal must precede the
Channel 2 signal . Since the signals show true time relation-
sh ip , time-d ifference measurements can be made.
Channel 1 Output and Cascaded Operation
If α
lower
deflection
factor
than provided
by
the
VOLTS/DIV switches
is desired , C hannel
1 can be used
as α wide-band pream plifier for C hannel 2 . Apply the input
signal to th e CH
1 OR Χ connector. Connect α 50-ohm
BNC cable (18-inch cable for maximum cascaded frequency
response) between the CH 1 OUT (sid e panel) and the CH 2
OR Υ connectors . Set the M ODE switch to CH 2 and the
ΙΝΤ TRIG
switch
to
N ORM . With both VOLTS/DIV
switch es set to 5 mV , the deflection factor will be less th an
one millivolt/division .
To provide calibrated one millivolt/d ivision deflection
factor, connect the .1-volt Calibrator signal to the CH 1 OR
Χ connector. Set the CH
1 VOLTS/DIV switch to .1 and
the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch to 5 mV . Adjust th e Channel
2 VAR VOLTS/DIV control to produce α display exactly
five d ivisions in amplitude. The cascaded deflection factor
is determined by d ividing the CH
1 VOLTS/DIV switch
2-18
setting by 5 (C H 2 VOLTS/DIV switch and VAR control
remain as set above) . For example, with the CH 1 VOLTS/
DIV switch set to 5 mV, the calibrated deflection factor
will be 1 mill ivolt/division ; CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch set to
10 mV, 2 millivolts/division, etc.
4. The MOD E switch and Channel
1 VAR VOLTS/DIV
control have no effect on the signal available at the CH
1
OUT connector .
6. The dynamic range of the Channel 1 In put Preamp is
equal to about 20 times the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV setting. The
CH
1 OUT signal is nominally at 0 volt DC for α 0 volt DC
input level
(Channel
1 POSITION con trol centered) . The
Channel
1 POSITION control can be used to center the
output signal with in the dynamic range of the am plifier .
ι
2. Keep both vertical POSITION controls set near mid-
range. If th e inpu t signal has α DC level which necessitates
one of the POSITION controls being
turned away from
mid range, correct operation can be obtained by keeping the
Channel 1 POSITION control near midrange and using the
Channel 2 POSITION control to position the trace near the
desired location . Then, use the Channel
1 POSITION con-
trol
for exact positioning. This method will keep both
Input Preamps operating in their linear range.
3. The ou tput voltage at the CH
1 OUT connector is at
least 25
millivolts/d ivision
of CRT display
in
all CH
1
VOLTS/DIV switch positions .
ι
5. The Ch annel 1 Input Preamp can be used as an imped -
ance match ing stage with or without voltage gain . The inpu t
resistance is one megohm and the outpu t resistance is about
50 ohms .
ι
ι
7. If dual-trace operation
is used , the signal applied to
the Channel 1
input connector is displayed when Channel 1
is tu rned on . When Ch annel 2 is turned on, the amplified
signal
is disp layed . Thus, Channel
1
trace can be used to
monitor the input signal wh ile the am plified signal is d is-
played by Channel 2.
In special applications where the flat frequency re-
3. Use vertical POSITIO N control settings wh ich most
sponse of the 453Α is not desired , α filter inserted between
nearly position the signal of each channel to mid-screen
the CH
1 OUT and CH 2 OR Υ connector allows
the
when viewed in either the CH
1 or CH 2 positions of the
oscillosco pe to essentially take on the frequency response
M OD E switch. Th is insures th e greatest dynamic range for
of the filter . Com bined with method 7, the input can be
ADD mode operation .
mon itored by Channel 1 and th e filtered signal displayed by
Channel 2.
4.
For
similar
response from each channel, set both
I nput Coupling switches to the same position.
9. By using Channel
1
as α 5Χ low-level voltage p re-
amplifier (5 mV position), the Channel 1 signal available at
the CH 1 OUT connector can be used for any app lication
Trigger Source
where
α
low-impedance
pream plified
signal
is needed .
INT . For most applications, the sweep can be triggered
Remember th at if α 50-ohm load impedance is used , the
signal am plitude will be about one-half .
internally . In the ΙΝΤ position of the Triggering SOURC E
switch ,
the trigger signal
is obtained from
the Vertical
Deflection System . The ΙΝΤ T R IG switch provides further
Algebraic Add i tion
selection of th e
internal trigger signal ; obtained from the
Channel
1 signal in the CH 1 OR Χ-Υ position, or from the
General. The ADD position of the MOD E switch can be
d isplayed
signal when
in the N ORM position. For single-
used to d isplay th e sum or difference of two signals, for
trace d isplays of either channel,
the N ORM position pro-
common-mode rejection to remove an undesired signal, or
vides the most convenient operation. H owever, for dual-
for DC offset (applying α DC voltage to one channel to
trace d isplays special considerations must be made to pro-
offset the DC component of α signal on the other channel) .
vide the correct disp lay . See Dual-Trace Operation in th is
section for dual-trace triggering information .
The common-mode re jection ratio of the 453Α is greater
than 20:1 at one kilohertz (at all deflection factors) for sig-
LINE . The L INE position of th e SOURCE switch εοη-
ηαΙ amplitu des up to eight times the VOLTS/DIV switch
nects α sam ple of the power-line frequency to the Trigger
setting . Higher re jection ratios can typically be ach ieved by
Generator circu it . L ine triggering is useful when the input
careful adjustment of the gain
of
eith er channel wh ile
signal is time-related to the line frequency . It is also useful
observing the displayed common-mode signal .
for provid ing α stable d isplay of α line-freq uency com po-
nent in α complex waveform .
I
Deflection Factor. The overall d eflection factor in the
ADD position of the MODE switch when both VOLTS/DIV
switches are set to the same position
is the same as the
deflection factor
indicated by either VOLTS/DIV switch .
The am plitude of an added mode disp lay can be determined
d irectly from
the resultant CRT deflection multiplied by
the
deflection
factor
ind icated
by
either VOLTS/DIV
switch. However,
if the CH
1
and CH
2 VOLTS/DIV
switches are set to different deflection factors, resu ltant
voltage is difficu lt to determine from the CRT display. In
this case, the voltage am plitude of the resultant display can
be determined accurately only if the amplitude of the signal
applied to either channel is known.
EXT. An external signal connected to the ΕΧΤ TR IG
I NPUT connector can be used to trigger the sweep in the
ΕΧΤ position of the Triggering SO URCE switch . The ex-
ternal signal must be time-related to the displayed signal for
α stable display. An external trigger signal can be used to
provide α triggered d isp lay when the internal signal is too
low
in amplitu de for correct triggering, or contains signal
components on wh ich it is not desired to trigger . It is also
u seful when signal tracing
in amp lifiers, phase-sh ift net-
works, waveshap ing circuits, etc. The signal from α single
point in the circuit under test can be connected to the ΕΧΤ
TRIG
I NPUT connector through α signal probe or cable .
The'sweep is th en triggered by the same signal at all times
and
allows
amplitud e, time -relationship
or waveshape
Precautions . The following general precautions shou ld be
changes of signals at various points in the circuit to be
observed when using the ADD mode.
examined without resetting the trigger controls .
1 . Do not exceed the input voltage rating of the 453Α .
ΕΧΤ - 10 . Operation in the ΕΧΤ - 10 position is the
same as described for ΕΧΤ except that the external trigger-
2. Do not apply signals that exceed an eq uivalent of
ing
signal
is attenuated
10 times. Attenuation of high-
about
20
times
the VOLTS/DIV
switch
setting .
F or
amplitude external triggeri ng signals is desirable to broaden
example, with α VOLTS/DIV switch setting of .5, the volt-
the range of
the Triggering LEVEL control. When the
age applied to that channel should not exceed about 10
COUPL I NG switch
is set to LF REJ, attenuation is abou t
volts. Larger voltages may distort the disp lay.
20:1 .
2-19
In the LF REJ position, DC is re jected and
signals below about 30 kilohertz are attenuated . Therefore,
General. F our methods of coupling the trigger signal to
the sweep will be triggered only by the higher-frequency
the
trigger
circuits
can be selected with the Triggering
components
of th e
signal . T h is
position
is particularly
COUPLING switches . Each position permits selection or
useful for provid ing stable triggering
if
the trigger signal
rejection of the frequency com ponents of the trigger signal
contains
line-freq uency components. Also,
in
the ALT
which can trigger the sweep. F ig . 2-8 graphically illustrates
position of the MOD E switch , the LF REJ position pro-
the band of frequ
itchencies covered by each position of the
vides the best display at high sweep rates when com paring
COUPL I NG sw
.
two unrelated signals (I NT TR IG switch set to N ORM) .
AC . The AC position blocks the DC component of the
trigger
signal .
Signals
with
low-frequency components
below about 30 hertz are attenuated . In general, AC coup-
ling can be used for most applications . However,
if the
trigger
signal
contains unwanted components or
if the
sweep
is to be triggered at α low repetition rate or α DC
level, one of the remaining COUPL
I NG switch positions
will provide α better disp lay .
DC . DC cou pling can be used to provide stable triggering
,
with low-frequency signals which would be attenuated in
The triggering point in the AC position depends on th e
the AC position, or with low-repetition rate signals . It can
average voltage level of the trigger signal . If the trigger sig-
also be used to trigger the sweep when the trigger signal
nals occur in α random fash ion, the average voltage level
reaches α DC level selected by the setting of the LEVEL
will vary, causing the triggering point to vary also . This sh ift
control . When using internal triggering, the setting of the
of the triggering point may be enough so it is im possible to
Channel
1 and 2 POSITIO N controls affects the DC trigger
maintain α stable display . In such cases, use DC cou pling .
level .
2-20
HF REJ. The HF REJ position passes all low-frequency
signals between about 30 hertz and 50 kiloh ertz . DC
is
re jected and signals outside the given range are attenuated.
When triggering from complex waveforms, this position is
useful for provid ing stable d isplay of low-frequency com po-
nents.
έ~σφ
oil
" θ~
φ
~`
:θ
:;σC
:σσσιισr~ 'φ~~
Γ
Fig . 2-8 . Frequency range of each COUPL ING switch position .
50
kHz
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
DC trigger coupling sh ould not be used in the ALT dual-
triggering . It is particularly usefu l when setting up the trig-
trace mode
if
the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch
is set to NORM .
If
ger circuits when α trigger signal is available without α trace
used, the sweep will trigger on the DC level of one trace and
disp layed on the CRT and it also
indicates that the Α sweep
then either lock out completely or free run on the other
remains correctly triggered when operating in the Β (DE
trace. Correct DC triggering for this mod e can be obtained
LAYED SWEEP) mode.
with the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch set to CH 1 OR Χ-Y .
Trigger Slope
The triggering S LOPE switch determines whether the
trigger circuit responds on the positive-going or negative-
going portion of the trigger signal . When the SLOPE switch
is in the + (positive-going) position, the d isp lay starts with
the positive-going
portion
of
the waveform ;
in
the -
(negative-going)
position,
the display
starts
with
the
negative-going portion of the waveform (see Fig . 2-9) . When
several cycles of α signal appear i n th e d isp lay, the setting of
the S LOPE switch is often unimportant . H owever, if only α
certain portion of α cycle is to be disp layed, correct setting
of the S LOPE switch
is imp ortant to provide α disp lay
which starts on the desired slope of the input signal .
Trigger Level
Α Sweep Mode
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
AUTO TR IG . The AUTO T R IG position
of
the Α
SWEEP MODE switch provides α stable d isplay when the Α
LEVEL control
is correctly set (see Trigger Level in th is
section)
and
α trigger signal
is available . The Α SWEEP
TR IG'D ligh t ind icates when the Α Sweep Generator is trig-
gered .
When the trigger repetition rate is less than a bout 20
hertz, or in the absence of an adequate trigger signal, the Α
Sweep Generator free runs to produce α reference trace.
When an adequate trigger signal
is again app lied , the free-
running condition ends and the Α Sweep Generator is trig-
gered to produce α stable display (with correct Α LEVEL
control setting) .
The Triggering LEVEL co ntrol determines the voltage
level on
the trigger signal at which the sweep is triggered.
NORM TR IG . Operation
i n the NORM TR IG position
When
the LEVEL control
is
set
in
the +
region, the
wh en α trigger signal is applied is the same as in the AUTO
trigger circuit responds at α more positive point on
the
TR IG position . However, when α trigger signal
is not pres-
trigger signal . When the LEVEL control
is set
in the -
ent, the Α Sweep Generator remains off and there
is no
region, the trigger
circuit
responds at α more
negative
display . The Α SWEEP TR IG'D light ind icates when the Α
point on the trigger signal . F ig . 2-9 illustrates th is effect
sweep is triggered . The NORM TR IG mode can be used to
with different settings of the S LOPE switch .
display signals with repetition rates below about 20 hertz .
Th is mode provides an
indication of an ad equate trigger
signal as well as the correctness of trigger control settings,
To set the LEVEL control, first select the Triggering
since th ere is no disp lay without proper triggering . Also, the
MODE, SOURC E, COUPL I N G, and SLOPE . Then set th e
Α SWEEP T R IG'D
light is off wh en the Α sweep is not
LEVEL control fully counterclockwise and rotate itclock-
correctly triggered .
wise u ntil the display starts at the desired point.
SINGLE SWEEP . When the signal to be displayed is not
High-Frequency Stability
repetitive or varies in amplitude, shape, or time, α conven-
The HF STAB control
(Α only) is used to provide α
tional repetitive display may produ ce an unstable presenta-
stable d isplay of h igh-freq uency signals . If α stable d isplay
tion . To avoid
th is, use the single-sweep feature of the
cannot be obtained using the Α LEVEL control (trigger
453Α. T he
SI NGLE SWEEP mode can also be used to
signal must have adequate am plitude), adjust the HF STA B
photograph α non-repetitive signal .
control for minimum horizontal
j itter in the display. This
control has little effect with low-frequency signals .
To use th e SI NG LE SWEEP mode, first make sure the
trigger circuit will respond to the event to be d isplayed . Set
Α Sweep Triggered L igh t
the Α SWEEP MOD E switch to AUTO T R IG or NORM
T R IG and obtain the best possib le display in the normal
The Α SWEEP TR IG'D
light provides α convenient indi-
man ner (for random signals, set the trigger circuit to trigger
cation of the cond ition of the Α Triggering circu it . If the Α
on α signal wh ich is approximately the same amplitude and
Triggering controls are correctly adj usted with an adequate
frequ ency as th e rand om signal) . Then, set the Α SWEEP
trigger signal
applied, the light
is on . H owever,
if the Α
M ODE switch to SI NGLE SWEEP and press the RES ET
LEVEL control
is misadjusted , the Α CO UPLI NG
or Α
button. When the RESET bu tton is pushed, the next trigger
SOURCE switches incorrectly set, or the trigger signal too
pulse initiates the sweep and α single trace will be presented
low in amp litude, the Α SWEEP TR IG'D light will be off.
on the screen . After th is sweep is com plete, the Α Sweep
This feature can be u sed as α general indication of correct
Generator
is "locked ou t" until
reset . Th e RESET light
2-21
( - 1 Slope
SLOPE
SLOPE
F ig . 2-9 . E ffects of Triggering LEVEL con trol and SLOPE switch .
Waveforms ob tain ed with the Triggering
LEVEL con trol set in the+ region .
Waveforms obtained with the Triggering
LEVEL control set in the - region.
_
Ι
Positive
"1 + 1 Slope
ι
ι
Negative
EmMisom
ΜΕιιιιι
located insid e
the RES ET button
is on wh en th e Α Sweep
Generator circuit has been reset and is ready to p roduce α
sweep; it goes out after the sweep is com plete . To prepare
the
circuit
for
another
single-sweep
d isplay, press
the
RESET button again .
H orizontal Sweep R ate
The Α A ND
Β TIME/DIV
switches select
cali brated
sweep rates for th e Sweep Generators . The Α VA R and Β
VA R IABLE controls provide continuously variable sweep
rates
between
th e
settings
of
the TIME/DIV
switches .
Whenever th e UNCAL Α OR Β ligh t is on, the sweep rate of
either Α or Β Sweep Generator, or both , is u ncalibrated.
The light is off when th e Α VA R (front panel) and Β TIME/
DI V VA R IA BLE
(sid e panel) controls are both set to the
calibrated position .
The sweep rate of th e Α Sweep Generator is bracketed
by
the two black lines on the clear p lastic flange of th e
TIME/DIV switch (see F ig . 2-10) . T he sweep rate of the Β
Sweep Generator is indicated by the dot on the D ELAY E D
SWEEP knob . When th e d ot on the outer knob is set to the
same position as the lines on the inner knob , th e two knobs
lock together and the sweep rate of bot h Sweep Generators
is ch anged at the same time . However, when the D ELAYE D
SWEEP knob
is pulled outward,
the clear plastic flange is
disengaged and only
the Β Sweep Generator sweep rate is
changed . Th is allows changing the delayed sweep rate wit h -
out changing the delay time determined by the Α Sweep
Generator .
Operating Instructions-453Α/R 453A
First-division
Nin th-division
vertical line
vertical
line
Time
measureme n t
area
Fig . 2-11 . Area of graticule used for acc u rate time measuremen ts .
When making time meas u rements from th e graticu le, the
area
between the first-division and ninth -d ivision vertical
lines provides the most linear time measurement (see Fig .
2-11) . Th erefore, the first and last division of the d isp lay
should not be used for mak ing accurate time meas u rements .
Position
th e start of
the timing area to the first-division
vertical line and set the TIME/DIV switch so th e end of the
timing area falls between th e first- and ninth -d ivision verti-
cal lines .
Sweep Magnification
The sweep magnifier expands th e sweep 10 times . The
center division of the unmagnified d isplay
is the portion
visi ble on
the screen
in magnified form
(see Fig . 2-12) .
Equ ivalent length of th e magnified sweep is about 100 divi-
sions ; any 10-d ivision portion may be viewed by adjusting
the horizontal POSITIO N control to bring the desired por-
tion onto
the viewing area . The F I NE position control is
particularly
usefu l when the magnifier
is on, as
it provides
positioning in small increments for more precise control .
To use
the magnified sweep, first move the portion of
the disp lay wh ich
is
to be expanded to the center of th e
graticule
. Then
set
the MAG switch
to X10 . The FINE
position control can be adjusted to position the magnified
display as desired . Th e light located below th e MAG switch
is on whenever the magnifier is on .
When the MAG switch is set to Χ 10, the sweep rate is
determined by dividing the TIME/DIV switch setting by 10.
For examp le, if the TIME/DIV switch is set to .5 μ s, the
magnified sweep
rate
is 0.05
microsecond/division . The
Fig . 2-1ο
. Α AND Β TIME/DIV switch .
magnified sweep rate must be used for all time measure-
2-23
Operating Instru ctions-453Α/R453A
2-24
- MAG switch set
to Χ10
ι
~
L
Fig . 2-12 . Operation of sweep magnifier .
[H
Magnified waveform
SEENEEMENE
MENNEENNEE
"Γιr~ιΕ2CRΕ7
EMMMEENNNN
FENNEEMENE
MENEEMMEME
Fig . 2-13 .
(Α) Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β display (Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V, .5 ms ; Β
ΤΙΜΕ/DIV, 50 μs), ( Β) Β (DELAYED SWEEP) display .
ments when th e MAG switch is set to Χ10. The magnified
sweep rate is calibrated when the UNCAL Α OR Β light is
off.
corresponds to 3 .55 CRT d ivisions of Α sweep. This reading
multiplied by the setting of the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch gives
Mixed and Delayed Sweep
the calibrated delay time before the start of the Β sweep
(see Β Sweep Mode which follows) . The intensified portion
The delayed sweep
( Β
sweep)
is operable
in
the Α
of th e d isplay
is produced by the Β sweep. The length of
ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β, Β (D ELAY ED SWEEP), and MIX ED
this portion
is about 10 times the setting of the Β TIME/
positions of th e HO R IZ DISPLAY switch. The Α sweep
DI
V switch.
rate along with the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial set-
ting determines the time th at the Β sweep is delayed . Sweep
rate of the delayed portion is determined by the Β TIME/
When the HO R IZ DIS PLAY
switch is set to Β (D E
DI V (D ELAY ED SWEEP) switch setting .
LAY ED SWEEP), only the intensified portion wh ich was
shown in the A ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG B position is displayed οη
the screen at the sweep rate indicated by the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
In the Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR I NG Β position, the display will
switch (see Fig. 2-13Β) .
appear similar to Fig. 2-13Α. The amount of delay time
between th e start of Α sweep and the intensified portion is
determined by the setting of the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch and
The MIX ED position of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch
the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial .
provides
α C RT display containing more than one time
factor on the horizontal axis . The first part of the d isp lay is
at the sweep rate set by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch and for
For example, th e delay ind icated by th e DELAY-TIME
th e time d uration determined by the setting of the DELAY-
MULTIPL I ER dial setting shown in Fig. 2-14 is 3.55; th is
TIME MULTI PL I ER dial.The latter part of th e display is at
th e sweep rate set by the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch . F ig . 2-15
ill u strates α typ ical mixed sweep disp lay .
Β Sweep Mode . The Β SWEEP MOD E switch provides
two modes of delayed sweep o peration . F ig . 2-16 illustrates
the difference between these two modes . In th e Β STA R TS
AFTER DELAY TIME position, the Β swee p is presented
immediately after the delay time
(see F ig
. 2-16A) . The B
sweep is triggered at α selected point on Α swee p to provide
the delay time
( Β sweep essentially free running) . Since th e
delay time
is the same for each sweep,
the d isplay appears
stable .
In
the T R IGG ER ABLE AFT ER
DELAY TIME
position,
the Β swee p operates only when it is triggered (by
Trigger
Circuits)
after
th e selected delay time
(see F ig .
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
Fig . 2-14 . DELAY-TIME MULTIPL IER dial . Reading shown : 3.55 .
ι
Α Sweep
ι
FE- (Delay) -1. ι
ι
Time
~k--(- Β Sweep Time
ι
ι
Fig. 2-15 . Α typical mixed sweep display (Α ΤΙΜΕ /DI V set to 1 ms,
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV set to .1 ms, and the DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER dial
set to 3.55) .
Operating Instructions-453Α/R 453A
2-16Β ) . The Β Triggering controls operate as d escribed in
th is section .
Delayed Sweep Operation . To obtain
α delayed sweep
display, use th e following p rocedure .
1 .
Obtain
α stable d isp lay with
the H O R IZ DISPLAY
switch set to Α
.
2 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR-
I N G Β .
3 . Set the Β SWEEP MOD E switch to the desired setting .
If TR IGG ER ABLE A FTER DELAY TIME is selected, cor-
rect Β Triggering is also necessary .
4 . Set the delay time with the Α ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch and
the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial .
5 . Pull th e D ELAY E D SWEEP
(Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V ) knob out
and set to th e d esired sweep rate .
6 .
If
the
T R IGG ERABLE A FTER
D ELAY
TIME
position
is used, check the d isp lay for an intensified por-
tion . Absence of the intensified zone indicates that Β sweep
is not correctly triggered.
7 . Set th e HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (D ELAYE D
SWEEP) . The
intensified zone
shown
in
the Α ΙΝΤΕΝ
D UR I N G Β position
is now d isplayed at the sweep rate
selected by the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch .
Several examples using
the delayed sweep feature are
given under Basic App lications in th is section .
Mixed Sweep Operation . To obtain α mixed sweep dis-
play, use th e following procedure :
1 . Follow the proced ure given above for Delayed Sweep
Operation .
2 . Set the ΗΟΒΙΖ DISPLAY switch to M IX E D . The first
part of the d isplay
is at the sweep rate set by the Α TIME/
DI V switch . The
last part
is at the sweep rate of th e Β
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . The DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial
determines the point th at the sweep rate changes from Α to
Β .
Α Sweep Length . The Α SWEEP LENGTH control
is
most useful when used with d elayed sweep . As the control
is rotated co u nterclockwise from
the FULL position, the
length of the Α sweep decreases (sweep rate remains con-
stant) until
it
is about four d ivisions long in the cou nter-
2-25
Α sweep time
Ι
~Ε
Α sweep time
1
~~Delay
Ι
ι
Time ~1
Α sweep
(Variable
~~starts Β sweep
f rom 1 μs
j
i
to 50 s by
Ι
~Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
Ι
and
Ι
:DELAY-TIME',,
I MULTIPL I ER)
1
-Ε}-Β sweep time
/
\
Α sweep
/
\
display
1
Delay __*j
Α sweep
Ι
Time
;Ε"-- ""arms" Β sweep
(Variable
Ί
Β sweep waits
from 1 μs
1
0
for next trigger
1
to 50 s by
Ι
'-Ε-Β trigger pulse
IA ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
Ι
1
Ι
and
Ι
I
-Εε-Β sweep time
(DELAY-ΤΙΜΕ '
'
Ί
MULTI PL I ER):
Ι
1
Α trigger
Α trigger
1
Ι
pulse
pulse
Ι
1
Ι
Ι
1
1
1
1
1
ε
ι
/
\
Ι
A sweep
MMMMAIEEI
I- display
I ntensified portion
\\
Ί
Intensified portion
of waveform
\\
of waveform
Μ"""ΕΜ""Ε"
"Η""ΕΜ"ΜΕ"
Ν"""ΜΕ/""Μ
"ΕΝΜΕΜ"Ε"
W"""ΜΕ"""Ε
Μ"""ΜΕΜ"ΜιΕ
ΜΕΝΕΜ """"
""""ΜΜ""""
Emmons
"""ΕΜ""""
ΜΕΝΕΜ
=
-
.
""""ΝI
(Α) Β STARTS A FTER DELAY TIME
(Β ) TR IGGERABLE AFTER DELAY TIME
clockwise position (not in Β EN DS Α detent) . The Β EN DS
time and delayed sweep rate in
the normal manner . Tu rn
Α
position produces
α d isplay which ends immediately
the Α SWEEP LEN GTH control counterclockwise until the
following Β sweep if the Β sweep ends before the normal
sweep ends immediately following the intensified portion
end of Α sweep. The Α SWEEP LEN GTH control is used to
on the display . Now set the H OR IZ DISPLAY switch to Β
increase the repetition rate of delayed sweep displays .
(D ELAY E D SWEEP) . Th is method provides
the maximum
repetition rate for α given delayed sweep display . In the Β
To use the Α SWEEP LEN GTH control, set the HO R IZ
ENDS Α position, th e maximum delayed sweep repetition
DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR I N G Β and set the delay
rate is maintained automatically .
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
'F ig . 2-16 . Com pa rison of delayed-sweep modes . (Α ) Β STARTS AFTER DELAY TIME, (Β ) TR IGGERABLE AFT ER DELAY TIME . In eac h
display the Β sweep is delayed α selected amount of time by the Α sweep .
ι
ι
Jitter can be introduced into the display and incor-
Intensity
(Z-axis) modu lation can
be used
to
relate α
rect displays produced through
the wrong usage of
third item of electrical phenomena to the vertical (Y-axis)
the Α SWEEP LENGTH control. When using this con-
and
the horizontal (X-axis) coordinates withou t affecting
trol,
first obtain
the best possible
display in the
the waveshape of th e d isplayed signal . T he Z-axis modu-
FULL position. Then, set the control for the desired
lating signal app lied to the C R T circuit changes the inten-
Α sweep length.
If jitter is evident in the display,
sity of th e d isplayed waveform to provide th is ty pe of dis-
readjust
the Triggering controls or change
the Α
play . "Gray scale" intensity modu lation can be obtained by
SWEEP LENGTH control to α position that does not
applying signals which do not com pletely blank the d isplay .
cause jitter.
Large am plitude signals of the correct polarity will com-
p letely blank th e d isplay ;
the
sharpest display
is provid ed
by
signals with
α fast rise and fall . The voltage am p litude
requ ired for visible trace mod ulation d epend s upon the set-
Χ -Υ Operation
ting of the INTENSITY control . At normal intensity level,
In some applications, it
is desirable to display one signal
α five-volt peak-to-peak signal produces α visible ch ange in
versus
another
(X-Y)
rather
th an
against time
(internal
brightness . Wh en the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT is not in use, keep the
sweep ) . The Χ -Υ position of th e HO R IZ DISPLAY switch
ground strap in place to prevent changes in trace intensity
provid es
α means for applying an external
signal to th e
due to extraneous noise .
horizontal am plifier for th is type of display .
Two modes
of external horizontal
operation
are pro-
vi ded
. When the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch is set to CH
1 O R Χ-Y,
the
Β
SO URC E
switch to
ΙΝΤ , and
the Β COUPL ING
switch
to
DC, the horizontal deflection
is provid ed by
α
signal applied
to
the C H
1 O R Χ connector . The CH
1
VO LTS/DI V switch setting
indicates
the calibrated hori-
zontal deflection factor (C hannel
1 VAR control inopera-
tive) . Center the horizontal POSITIO N control and use the
Channel
1 POSITIO N control for h orizontal positioning .
In
the ΕΧΤ and ΕΧΤ _ 10 positions of the Β SO UR CE
switc h , external horizontal deflection
is provid ed by α sig-
nal
ap plied to th e Β ΕΧΤ T R IG O R Χ
I NPUT connector,
The signal cou pling provided by
the Β CO UPL I N G switch
can be used to select or re ject com ponents of
the external
horizontal signal (all components of external horizontal sig-
nal accepted in DC position) . Using th is mode of operation,
the horizontal
deflection factor
is uncalibrated . External
horizontal deflection factor is about 270 mill ivolts/clivision
in the ΕΧΤ position of th e Β SOUR CE switch and about
2.7 volts/division in the ΕΧΤ : 10 position .
F or
fu rth er information on obtaining and
interpreting
lissajous d isplays, refer to th e reference book s listed und er
App lications .
Α and Β Gate
The Α and Β GATE outp ut connectors (on side panel)
provide α rectangular output pu lse wh ich is coincident with
Current. The cu rrent loop,
located on the
sid e panel,
the sweep time of th e respective sweep generator . Th is rec-
p rovides α five milliampere peak-to-peak square-wave cur-
tangular pu lse is abou t +12 volts in am plitude (into h igh -
rent wh ich can be used to
check and calibrate cu rrent-
impedance
loads)
wit h
pulse duration
the same
as
the
measuring probe systems . Th is current signal
is obtained by
respective sweep .
clipping the probe arou nd the current loop . C u rrent is con-
NO Τε
Intensity Modulation
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A
Time markers applied to the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT connector
provide α direct time reference on the disp lay . With uncali-
brated horizontal sweep or external horizontal mode oper-
ation,
the time markers provide α means of reading time
d irectly from the display . However,
if
the mark ers are not
time-related to
the displayed waveform, α single-sweep dis-
play
shou ld be used (for internal sweep only) to provide α
stable display .
Calibrator
General . The one-kilohertz square-wave Calibrator of th e
453Α provides α convenient signal source for checking basic
vertical gain and sweep timing . H owever, to provide maxi-
mum
measurement accuracy,
the
ad justment procedure
given
in
the Calibration section of th is manual should be
used. The Calibrator output signal
is also very useful for
adjusting probe compensation
as d escribed
in
the probe
instruction manual . In add ition, the Calibrator can be used
as α convenient signal
source for application to external
equipment .
Voltage . The Calibrator provides accurate peak-to-peak
squ are-wave voltages of 0 .1 and
1 volt into α h igh imped-
ance load . Voltage range is selected by th e CA L I BR ATO R
switch
on
the
sid e panel . Output resistance is about 200
ohms in the
1 V position and about 20 ohms in the 0 .1 V
position . The actual voltage across an external load resistor
can
be calculated in
the same manner as with any series
resistor combination (necessary only if th e load resistance is
less than about 50 kilohms) .
2-27
either position of
the CA L I-
Rufus
Ρ .
Turner, "Practical Oscilloscope H andbook",
BR ATOR switch . The arrow above the PROBE LOO P indi-
Volumes
1 and 2, Joh n F. Rider Publisher Inc ., N ew York ,
cates conventional cu rrent flow ; i.e ., from + to - .
1964 .
Freq uency . The Cali brator circu it uses frequency-stable
Pea k-to-Peak Voltage Measurements-AC
com ponents to maintain accurate frequency and constant
duty cycle . Thus th e Calibrator can be used for chec k ing
To ma ke α pea k-to-peak voltage measurement, use the
the basic sweep timing of the horizontal system .
following procedure :
Waveshape . The
square-wave outpu t signal of th e Cali-
brator can be used as α reference waveshape when check ing
or
adju stin g
th e compensation of passive, high-resistance
probes . Since th e square-wave output from th e Calibrator
has α flat top, any distortion in
the displayed waveform
is
due to th e probe com pensation .
The following information descri bes the proced ures and
techniques for making measurements with α 453Α Oscillo-
scope . These applications are not described in detail, since
each application m u st be ada pted to
the requirements of
the
ind ividual
measu rement . Th is instrument can also be
used for many applications wh ich are not described in th is
manual .
Contact
your
local Tektronix
F ield
Office
or
rep resentative
for assistance
in making
specific measure-
ments with th is instrument .
The following books describe oscilloscope measurement
tech niques wh ich can be adapted for use with this instru -
ment .
Harley Carter, "An
Introd uction to
the Cathode Ray
Oscilloscope",
Ph ilips
Technical
L ibrary,
Cleaver-Hume
Press L td., London, 1960 .
J oh n F. Rider and Seymour D . Uslan, "E ncyclopedia of
Cat h ode- R ay Oscilloscopes and Their U ses", John F . Rider
Publisher Inc ., N ew York , 1959 .
2-28
1 . Connect the signal to either input connector .
2 . Set th e MOD E switch to d isplay th e channel used.
3 . Set the VOLTS/DI V switch to display about five d ivi-
sions of the waveform .
4 . Set the Input Coup ling switch to AC .
APPL ICATIO NS
NOTE
General
For low-frequency signals below about 16 hertz, use
the DC position .
5 . Set the Α Triggering controls to obtain α stable dis-
play . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α position that displays
several cycles of the waveform .
6 . Turn the vertical POSITION control so the lower por-
tion of the waveform coincides with one of the graticule
lines below th e center horizontal
line, and the top of the
waveform
is on
the viewing area . M ove the disp lay with the
h orizontal POSITION control so one of the upper pea k s lies
near th e center vertical
li ne (see Fig . 2-17) .
Position to
center vertical
line
J . Czech , "Oscilloscope M easuring Technique", Ph ilips
Technical Library, Springer-Verlag, New York , 1965 .
Robert
G .
M idd leton,
"Scope Waveform
Analysis",
H oward W . Sams & Co . Inc ., The Bobbs- Merrill Com pany
Inc ., Ind ianapolis, 1963 .
Robert G . Middleton and L . Donald Payne, " Using the
Vertical
deflection
Oscilloscope in Industrial E lectronics', H oward W.Sams&
Co .
Inc ., The Bobbs-M errill Com pany
Inc .,
Indianapolis,
1961 .
J oh n F. Rider, "Obtai n ing and Interpreting Test Scope
Traces", Joh n F . Rider Pub lisher Inc ., New York , 1959 .
Fig . 2-17 . Meas u ring peak-to-pea k voltage of α waveform .
7 . M easure th e d ivisions of vertical deflection from peak
to peak . Make sure the VA R VO LTS/DI V control
is in th e
cali brated position .
To measure α voltage level with respect to a voltage
rather
than ground, make
the following changes in
step 6.
Set
the Input Coupling switch
to DC and
apply
the reference voltage to the INPUT connector.
Then position the trace to the reference line .
This technique may also be used to make measure-
ments between two points on
the waveform rather
than peak to peak.
7 . Set
the
Input Coup ling switch to DC . The ground
reference line can be checked at any time by switch ing to
the GN D position (except when using α DC reference volt-
8 . Mu ltiply
the distance
measured
in
step 7 by
the
age) .
VO LTS/DIV switch setting . Also includ e the attenuatio n
factor of the probe, if any .
8 . Set the Α Triggering controls to obtai n α stable dis-
play . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α setting
that displays
Example . Assu me α pea k-to-peak vertical deflection of
several cycles of the signal .
4.6 d ivisions (see F ig . 2-17) using α 10Χ attenuator pro be
and α VOLTS/DIV switch setting of .5 .
9 . M eas u re the distance in divisions between the refer-
ence
line and th e point on the waveform at wh ich th e DC
Using the formula :
level
is
to be measured. For exam ple,
in F ig . 2-18
th e
vertical
probe
measurement is made between the reference line and point
Volts
VOLTS/DIV
Α .
Peak to Peak - deflection Χ
setting
Χ attenuation
(divisions)
factor
Substituting the given values :
ΝΟΤΕ
Volts Peak to Peak = 4.6 Χ 0.5 V Χ 10
The peak-to-peak voltage is 23 volts .
Operating Instructions-453Α / R453A
NOΤΕ
10 . Establis h th e polarity of
the signal . If the waveform
is above the reference line, the voltage is positive ; below the
line, negative
(w h en
th e
I NVERT
switch
is push ed in
if
using C hannel 2) .
11 . Mu lti ply
the distance measured in
step 9 by the
VO LTS/DI V switch setting . Include th e attenuation factor
Instantaneous Voltage Measurements-DC
of the probe, if any .
To measu re the DC level at α given point on α waveform,
use the following procedu re :
1
. Connect th e signal to either input connector .
2
. Set the MOD E switch to display the channel used .
3
. Set the VO LTS/DI V switch to disp lay about five divi-
sions of the waveform .
ENEEMSEEME
/""ΝΕWιΕRΕ"
ιΜι ιΜι ιΕR
πm!ΕΝΝΝΝ
NNENEENEWE
4 . Set the In put Coupling switch to G N D .
Vertical
distance
5 . Set the Α SWEEP MOD E switch to AUTO TR IG .
6
. Position the trace to the bottom line of the gratic u le
Reference line
or other reference
line .
If the voltage
is negative with re-
spect to ground , position the trace to the top line of the
graticule . Do not move the vertical POSITIO N control after
Fig . 2-18 . Measu ring
in stantaneou s DC voltage wit h respect to α
th is reference line has been established .
reference .
2-29
Operating I nstructions-453Α/R453A
Example . Assume that the vertical distance measure d is
3 . To establish an arbitrary vertical deflection factor so
4.6 d ivisions
(see F ig . 2-18),
the waveform
is above the
the amplitu de of an un k nown signal can be measu red accur-
reference line, using α 10Χ attenu ator probe and α VO LTS/
ately
at any setting of the VO LTS/DIV switch , the amp li
DIV setting of 2 .
tude of
the reference signal must be known .
If it
is not
known,
it can be measu red before the VA R VO LTS/DI V
Using th e formu la :
control
is set in step 2 .
Instan-
vertical
VO LTS/
probe
taneous =
distance Χ polarity Χ
DIV
Χ attenuation
4 . Divide
the amplitu de of th e reference signal (volts) by
Voltage
(d ivisions)
setting
factor
the product of
the vertical deflection estab lished in step 2
(divisions) and the setting of th e VO LTS/DI V switch . Th is
Substituting the given values :
is the vertical conversion factor .
Instantaneous - 4.6X+1 Χ 2 V Χ 10
reference signal
Voltage
Vertical
Conversion =
am plitude (volts)
Factor
vertical
VO LTS/D
Ι V
Factor
The instantaneous voltage is +g2 volts .
deflection Χ
switch
(d ivisions)
setting
Comparison Measurements
General .
In some
applications
it may be desirable
to
estab lish arb itrary units of measu re other than th ose indi-
cated by the VOLTS/DIV switch or ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . Th is
is particularly usefu l when com paring unknown signals to α
reference am plitude
or
repetition
rate . One u se for
the
com parison-measurement
tech nique
is
to
facilitate
cali-
bration of equipment (e.g ., on an assembly-line test) where
the desired amp lit u de or repetition rate does not prod u ce
an exact number of d ivisions of deflection . The adjustment
will be easier and more accu rate
if arbitrary units of meas-
ure are establis h ed
so that correct adjustment is indicated
by an exact number of divisions of deflection . Arbitrary
sweep rates can be useful for com paring harmonic signals to
α fundamental freq uency, or for comparing
the repetition
rate of the input and output pu lses in α digital cou nt-down
circuit . T he following procedure descri bes how to establish
arbitrary units of measure for com parison measu rements .
Alth ough the procedure for establish ing vertical and hori-
zontal arbitrary u nits of measure
is much the same, both
processes are described in detail .
Vertical
Deflection
Factor . To establis h
an
arbitrary
vertical d eflection factor based upon
α specific reference
amp litude, proceed as follows :
1 . Connect the reference signal to
the in pu t connector .
Set the ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch to display several cycles of the
Vertical
signal .
Conversion =
30 V
=
1 .5
2 . Set
the V O LTS/DIV switch and the VA R VO LTS/
DIV control to produce α display an exact num ber of grati-
cule divisions
in
am plitude .
Do
not
change
th e VA R
VO LTS/DI V control after obtaining
the desired deflection .
Th is disp lay can be used as α reference for amplit u de com-
parison measurements .
2-30
5 . To meas u re the amplitude of an unknown signal, dis-
connect the reference signal and connect the un known sig-
nal to the input connector . Set th e VO LTS/DI V switch to α
setting th at provides su fficient vertical deflection to make
an
accurate
measurement .
Do
not
readju st
the VA R
VO LTS/D 1V control .
6 . Measure the vertical deflection in divisions and calcu-
late the amplitu de of the unk nown signal using the follow-
ing formula .
VO LTS/DI V
vertical
vertical
Signal
=
switch
Χ conversion Χ deflection
Amplitude
setting
factor
(divisions)
E XAMPLE : Assu me α reference signal am plitude of 30
volts,
α VOLTS/DIV
switch setting of 5 and
th e VA R
VO LTS/DI V control is adjusted to provide α vertical deflec-
tion of four divisions .
Su bstituting
these values in
the vertical conversion factor
formula (step 4) :
F actor
4 Χ 5 V
Then, wit h α VOLTS/DI V switch setting of 10, the peak-to-
peak amp litude of an un k nown
signal wh ich produ ces α
vertical deflection of five divisions can be determined by
u sing the signal am plitude formula (step 6) :
Signal
= 10 V Χ
1 .5 Χ 5 = 75 volts
Amplit ude
Operating Instructions-453Α/R 453A
Sweep Rates . To establish an arb itrary horizontal sweep
EXAMPLE : Assume α reference signal frequency of 455
rate based upon α specific reference frequency, proceed as
hertz
(repetition rate 2 .19 milliseconds), and α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
follows :
switch setting of .2 ms, with the Α VA R ΤΙΜΕ/DI V control
adjusted to
provide
α horizontal deflection of eigh t d ivi-
1 . Connect
the reference signal to the input connector .
sions . Substituting these values in the horizontal conversion
Set
the VOLTS/DIV switch for fou r or five d ivisions of
factor formu la (step 4)
:
vertical deflection .
H orizontal
2 .19 ms
2 . Set the ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch and the Α VA R ΤΙΜΕ /DI V
Conversion = 0.2 ms Χ 8
= 1 .37
control so one cycle of the signal covers an exact num ber of
Factor
horizontal divisions . Do not change the Α VAR ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
control after obtaining the desired deflection . Th is display
Then, with α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch setting of 50 μ s, th e repeti-
can be used as α reference for frequency comparison meas-
tion rate of an u n known signal which com pletes one cycle
urements .
in seven horizontal divisions can be determined by using the
3 . To establish an arb itrary sweep rate so th e repetition
rate of an unknown signal can be measu red accu rately at
any setting of the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch , the repetition rate of
the reference signal must be known . If
it is not known, it
can be meas u red before the Α VA R ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch is set
in step 2 .
4 .
Divide
th e
repetition
rate
of
the reference
signal
(second s) by the product of the horizontal deflection estab-
lish ed in step 2
(d ivisions) and th e setting of the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
switch . Th is is the h orizontal conversion factor .
Horizontal
reference signal
Conversion = repetition rate (seconds)
Factor
horizontal
ΤΙΜΕ /DIV
deflection Χ
switch
( divisions)
setting
6 . M easure
the horizontal deflection
in d ivisions and
calculate
the repetition
rate of th e un known signal using
the following form ula :
repetition rate formula (step 6) :
Repetition = 50 μs Χ 1 .37 Χ 7 = 480 μ s
Rate
Th is answer can be converted to frequency by taking th e
reciprocal of the repetition rate (see a pplication on Deter-
mining F requency) .
Time-Duration Measurements
To measu re time between two points on α waveform, use
the following procedure :
1 . Connect th e sign al to either input connector .
2 . Set the MOD E switch to display th e channel used .
5 . To measure the repetitio n rate of an un known signal,
3 . Set the VO LTS/DI V switch to display about five divi
d isconnect the reference signal and connect th e u nknown
sions of th e waveform .
signal to the input con n ector . Set the TI ΜΕ/DI V switch to
α setting
that provides sufficient h orizontal deflection
to
make an
accurate measu rement . Do not readjust the Α
4 . Set the Α Triggering controls to obtain α stable d is-
VAR ΤΙΜΕ/DI V control .
play .
5 . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to th e fastest sweep rate
th at d isplays
less
than
eight divisions between
th e time
measu remen t points (see F ig . 2-19) . (See the topic entitled
Selecting
Sweep
Rate
in
th is
section
concerning
non-
linearity of first and last divisions of d isplay .)
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
h orizontal
horizontal
Repetition =
switch
Χ conversion Χ deflection
Rate
setting
factor
(divisions)
6 . Adjust the vertical POSITIO N control to move th e
points between which the time measurement is made to th e
NOTE
center horizontal line .
If the horizontal magnifier is used, be sure to use the
magnified sweep
rate in place of
the Τ/ΜΕ/D/ V
7 . Ad ju st th e h orizontal POSITION control to center the
switch setting.
display with in the center eight divisions of the graticule .
2-3 1
Operating Instructions-453 Α/ R453A
2-32
F ig . 2-19 . Meas u ri ng the
time du ration between points on α wave-
form .
8 . Measure
the h orizontal distance between
the time
measurement points. Be
sure the Α VAR control
is set to
the calibrated p osition .
9 . Mu ltip ly the distance measured in step 8 by the set-
ting of
the ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
switch .
If sweep magnification
is
used , divide th is answer by 10 .
h orizontal
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
distance
Χ
setting
Time Duration = (divisions)
magnification
Substituting the given values :
U se th e following procedure :
The time duration is 0.5 millisecond .
90% points on the waveform .
periodically-recurrent
signal
is the
reciprocal of the time
du ration
(period ) of one cycle .
1 . Measure the time d uration of one cycle of th e wave-
form as described in the previous application .
2 . Take the reciprocal of the time duration to determine
the frequency .
Example . The frequency of the signal shown in F ig . 2-19
wh ich has α time duration of 0.5 millisecon d is :
Frequency =
1
=
1
= 2 kHz
time duration
0.5 ms
R isetime Measurements
R isetime
measurements
emp loy
basically
the
same
tech niques as time-du ration measurements . The main d iffer-
ence
is the p oints between wh ich the measurement is made .
The following procedu re gives the basic method of measur-
ing risetime between the 10% and 90% points of the wave-
form . Falltime can be measured in the same manner on the
trailing edge of the waveform .
1 . Connect the signal to eith er input connector .
Example . Assume that the horizontal distance between
the time measurement points is five d ivisions (see F ig . 2-19)
and th e ΤΙΜΕ /DIV switch is set to .1 ms with th e magnifier
off .
3 . Set
the VO LTS/DI V switch and VAR V OLTS/DI V
control to prod uce α d isplay an exact num ber of divisions
Using the formu la :
in am plitud e .
2 . Set th e MODE switch to display the channel u sed.
4 . Center the d isp lay about the center h orizontal line .
5 . Set the Α Triggering controls to obtain α stable dis-
play .
Time Duration = 5 Χ 0.1 ms
1
6 . Set th e ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch to the fastest sweep
rate
that displays less than eight d ivisions between the 10% and
Determining F requency
7 . Determine the 10% and 90% points on th e rising por-
tion of the waveform . The fig u res given in Table 2-2 are for
Th e time measurement
technique can also be used to
the points 10% up from
the start of th e rising portion and
measure
the
frequency of α
signal . Th e
frequency
of α
10% down from th e top of
the rising portion (90% point) .
8 . Adjust the horizontal POSITIO N control to move the
10% point of the waveform to
the first graticule line . F or
Time-Difference Measurements
example, with α five-d ivision display as sh own in F ig . 2-20,
the 10% point is 0.5 division up from
the start of the rising
The calibrated sweep rate and dual-trace features of the
portion .
453Α allow measurement of time d ifference between two
separate events . To measure time d ifference, use th e follow-
ing proced u re .
9 . Measure the horizontal d istance between the 10% and
90% points . Be sure th e Α VAR control is set to the cali-
brated position .
10. Multiply
the distance measured
in step 8 by
the
setting
of the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . If sweep magnification
is
used, divide th is answer by 10 .
Examp le . Assume
that the horizontal d istance between
the 10% and 90% points is four d ivisions (see Fig . 2-20) and
the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch is set to
1 μ s with the MAG switch
set to Χ 10 .
8 . If possib le, set the ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch for α sweep rate
which
shows th ree or more d ivisions between the two wave-
Fig . Ζ-20 . Measuring risetime .
for um s.
Vertical
display
(divisions)
10% and 90%
points
4
0 .4 and 3.6 d ivisions
5
0 .5 and 4.5 d ivisions
6
0 .6 and 5.4 d ivisions
7
0 .7 and 6.3 d ivisions
8
0 .8 and 7 .2 d ivisions
TABLE 2-2
ι
Ι
ι
ι
Horizon tal
1
d istance
Ι
Divisions vertically
between 10% &
90% points
_3 .2
_4 .0
_4 .8
_5 .6
6.4
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A
Applying th e time duration form u la to risetime :
horizontal
ΤΙΜΕ /DIV
d ista nce
Χ
R isetime
setting
_ (divisions)
(Time Duration)
magnification
Su bstituting the given values :
R isetime -- 4 Χ 1 μs
10
The risetime is 0 .4 microsecond.
1 . Set the Input Coup ling switches to the desired coup-
ling positions .
2 . Set
th e M OD E
switch
to either CH O P or ALT .
In
general, CH OP
is more suitable for low-frequency signals
and the A LT position
is more su itable for h igh-frequency
signals . M ore information on determining the mode is given
under Dual-Trace O peration in th is section .
3 . Set the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch to CH
1 OR Χ-Y .
4 . Connect the reference signal to the CH
1 OR Χ con-
nector and the comparison signal to CH 2 OR Υ connector .
The reference signal
shou ld precede th e com parison signal
in time . Use coaxial cables or probes wh ich have equ al time
1-1-1
delay to connect the signals to the inpu t connectors .
5 .
If th e signals are
of opposite polarity,
pull ou t th e
I NVERT switch to invert the Channel 2 display (signal may
be of opposite polarity due to 180° time difference ;
if so
take into account in final calcu lation) .
6 . Set the V O LTS/DIV switches to produce fou r or five-
division d isplays .
7 . Set the Α LEVEL control for α stable display .
2-33
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A
9 . Adjust the vertical POSITIO N controls to center each
Substituting the given values :
waveform (or the points on the d isplay between wh ich the
measu rement
is made)
in relation to the center horizontal
50 μs Χ 4.5
line .
Time Delay =
10
10 . Ad ju st
the
h orizontal
POSITIO N
control
so
the
Channel
1
(reference)
waveform
crosses
th e center h ori
zontal line at α vertical graticule
li ne .
NOTE
Do not use the MIXED position of the ΗΟR /Ζ DlS-
11 . Measure the horizontal difference between the Chan-
PLAY switch
to make time measurements with
the
nel
1
waveform
and
the Ch annel 2 waveform
(see F ig .
DELA Y-TIME MUL TIPL IER dial. /η th is mode, error
2-21) .
is in troduced into the measurement due to the special
relationship between the Α and Β sweeps .
12
. Mu ltip ly the measured difference by the setting of
the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
switch .
If
sweep
magnification
is
used,
divide th is answer by 10 .
Example . Assu me that the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch is set to 50
μs, the MAG switch to Χ 10, and the horizontal difference
between waveforms is 4.5 d ivisions (see Fig . 2-21) .
Using the formula :
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
horizontal
Χ difference
setting
(division s)
2 . Set
the VO LTS/DI V
switch
to produce α display
Time Delay =
ρ
magnification
about four d ivisions in amplitude .
Channel 1 ( reference)
Channel 2
.
. .
MMMMMMMMMM
11ιιιΕιιι
ιιιιιιιιι
EMMMMMINNIMM
MMMMMMENIMM
M0
MMENIMM
υ~. ι ι ι cαιαυκο~
The time delay is 22 .5 microseconds .
Delayed Sweep Time Measurements
T he delayed sweep mode can be used to make accurate
time measurements . Th e following measurement determines
the time d ifference between two pulses disp layed on
the
same trace . Th is application may
also be used to measure
time d ifference from two different sources (dual-trace) or
to measure time duration of α single pulse . See Section
1
for measu rement accuracy .
1 . Connect the sign al to either in put connector . Set th e
M OD E switch to d isplay th e channel used .
3 . Adju st th e Α Triggering controls for α stable d isplay .
4 .
If possi b le, set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α sweep
rate
which
displays
about
eight d ivisions between
the
pulses .
5 . Set th e HOR IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR-
I N G Β and
the Β
SWEEP M OD E
switch
to Β STA RTS
AFTER DELAY TIME .
6 . Set the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α setting 1/100t h of
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V sweep rate . Th is produ ces an intensified
portion about 0 .1 d ivision in length .
ΝΟΤΕ
Do not change
the Α L EVEL control setting or the
horizontal POSITION control setting in the following
Fig . 2-21 . Measu ring time difference between two pulses .
steps as the measurement accuracy will be affected.
2-34
7 . Tu rn the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial to move
Exam ple . Assume
the first d ial setting
is
1 .31
and the
the intensified portion to the first pu lse .
second d ial setting
is 8.81 with the Α TI ΜΕ /DI V switch set
to 0.2 microsecond (see Fig . 2-22) .
8 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (D ELAYED
SWEEP) .
9 . Adj ust the DELAY-TI ME MULTI PL I ER d ial to move
second
first
delay time
the pu lse (or the rising portion) to the center vertical line .
Time Difference =
dial
-
dial
Χ
( Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
N ote the setting of
the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL
I ER dial .
(delayed sweep )
setting
setting
setting)
10 . Turn
the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial clock -
Substituting the given values :
wise until the second pu lse is positioned to th is same point
(if
several pulses are displayed,
ret u rn
to
the Α ΙΝΤΕΝ
Time Difference= [8.81 - 1 .31] Χ 0.2 μs
D UR I NG
Β position to locate
the correct pulse) . Again
note th e dial setting .
The time difference is 1 .5 microseconds .
11 . Subtract th e first d ial setting from the second and
mu ltiply by
the delay time
shown by
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
switch . Th is is the time interval between the pulses .
DELAY-TIME
DELAY-TIME
MULTIPLIER dial :
MULTIPLIER dial :
1 .31
8.81
on ~000=0
NNNNEEN EN
NNEEMENNNE
EMMMMM
MM
MMMMMMMMMM
131111~
,
!III
Using th e formu la :
Delayed Sweep Magnification
Operating Instructions-453A/ R 453A
The delayed sweep feature of th e 453Α can be used to
provide h igher apparent magnification than is provided by
th e MAG switch . The sweep rate of the DELAYE D SWEEP
( Β sweep)
is not actually increased ; the apparent magnifi-
cation is the
resu lt of delaying the Β sweep an amou nt of
time selected by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch and the DELAY-
TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial before th e d isplay
is presented at
the sweep rate selected by the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . The
following methods use
the Β STARTS AFTER DELAY
TIME position
to allow
the delayed portion to be posi-
tioned with the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial . If there
is too much jitter in the delayed d isplay, use the Triggered
Delayed Sweep Magnification procedu re .
1 . Connect the signal to either input connector . Set th e
MOD E switch to d isp lay th e channel used .
2 .
Set
the VOLTS/DIV switch to produce
α d isplay
about 4 d ivisions in amp litu de .
3 . Adju st the Α Triggering controls for α stable display .
4 . Set th e Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α sweep rate which
disp lays th e complete waveform .
5 . Set th e HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR-
I N G Β and
the Β
SWEEP M OD E
switch to Β STARTS
AFTER DELAY TIME .
(Β ) Β (DELAYED SWEEP)
display.
6 . Position the start of the intensified portion with the
DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER dial to the part of the display
Fig . 2-22 . Measuri ng time difference using delayed sweep .
to be magnified .
2-35
7 . Set the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α setting wh ich intensi-
fies the fu ll portion to be magnified . The start of the inten-
sified trace will remain as positioned above .
8 . Set th e HO RIZ DISPLAY switch to Β (DELAY E D
SWEEP) .
9 . Time measurements can be made from the d isplay in
the conventional manner . Sweep rate is determined by the
setting of th e Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch .
10 . The apparent sweep magnification can be calculated
by dividing the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch setting by the Β TIME/
DI V switch setting .
Example . The apparent magnification
of
the display
shown in F ig . 2-23 with an Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch setting of
.1 ms and α Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch setting of 1 μs is :
2-36
Apparent Magnification - Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V setting
(delayed sweep)
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V setting
Substituting th e given val u es :
Apparent
1 Χ 10-4
Magnification
1 Χ 10-6
The apparent magnification is 100 times .
Triggered
Delayed Sweep Magnification . The delayed
sweep magnification method just described may produce
too much
j itter at h igh apparent magnification ranges . The
T R IGG ER ABLE AFTER D ELAY TIME position of the Β
SWEEP MODE switch provides α more stab le display since
th e delayed display is triggered at th e same point each time .
1 . Set up
the display as given in steps
1 throu gh 7 de-
scri bed above .
2 . Set th e Β SWEEP MODE switch to T R IGG ERA BLE
AF TER DELAY TIME .
3 . Adju st the Β LEVEL control so the intensified por-
tion on the trace is stable . (If an intensified portion cannot
be obtained, see step 4 .)
Pu lse to be
magn ified
on
MEN
mom
ΙNEEMEENEEN
MENEEMENNE
ENNEEMENOM
(Α ) Α sweep d isplay .
ιrι:ι...ι~ι
ι
NEENEENEEN
(Β ) Delaye d sweep display .
Fig. 2-23 . Using delayed sweep for sweep mag nification .
dition cannot be remed ied with the Β Triggering controls or
by increasing the d isp lay am plitude (lower VO LTS/DI V set-
ting), externally trigger the Β sweep.
5 . When
the
correct
portion
is
intensified ,
set
the
H O R IZ DISPLAY switch to Β (D ELAYE D SWEEP) . Slight
re-adjustment of the Β LEVEL control may be necessary
for α stable d isp lay .
6 . Measu rement
and
magnification
are
as described
above .
Displaying Complex Signals Using Delayed Sweep
Complex signals often consist of α num ber of individ u al
4 .
Inability to intensify
the desired portion
indicates
events of differing am plitudes . Since the trigger circu its are
that the
Β Triggering controls are incorrectly set or
the
sensitive to changes in signal amp litud e, α stable display can
signal d oes not meet the triggering requirements . If the con-
normally be obtained only when the sweep is triggered by
th e event(s) having the greatest amp litude . However, th is
may not prod uce the desired display of α lower am p litude
event wh ich follows the triggering event . The delayed sweep
feat u re provides α means of delaying
the
start of the Β
sweep by α selected amount following th e event wh ich trig-
gers th e Α Sweep Generator . Th en,
the part of the wave-
form wh ich contain s
th e information of interest can be
displayed .
Use the following p rocedure :
1 . Connect the signal to either input connector . Set the
MODE switch to display the channel u sed .
2 .
Set
th e VO LTS/DI V
switch to produce
α disp lay
about four d ivisions in amp litude .
3 . Adjust the Α Triggering controls for α stable display .
4 . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α sweep rate wh ich
displays the complete waveform .
5 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR-
I N G
Β and the
Β SWEEP MODE switch to Β STA R TS
A FTER D ELAY TIME .
6 . Position the start of the intensified portion with the
DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial to the part of the display
to be magnified .
7, Set the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α setting which
inten-
sifies
the
fu ll
portion
to be magnified . The start of the
intensified trace will remain as positione d above .
Operating Instructions-453Α/R453A
MENEEMENNE
MENEEMEEME
EMEEMOMMMM
ONNOMMUNNE
0rιιιιυ6ίNοWi rι i"
EMENSEEMEN
(Α) Th is portion of display cannot be viewed ade-
quately because Α sweep is triggered on larger amp li-
tude sign als at start of d isplay .
MENNEEMENE
NEENEEMMMM
MMMMMMMMMM
suffiammmmmm
ΜΜΜΜO-ιιιιΜΜΜ
!"lUl"ΜΜ""/"
EMBEEMENNE
NEENEEMENE
(Β ) Area of
interest displayed by delaying Β sweep
(Β STARTS AFTER DELAY TIME mode) .
F ig . 2-24 . Displaying α complex signal u si ng delayed sweep .
Pulse Jitter Measurements
8 . Set the HOR IZ DISPLAY switch
to Β (DELAYE D
SWEEP) .
In some
applications
it
is
necessary
to
measure
the
amount of
j itter on th e leading edge of α pulse, or
j itter
between pulses .
9 . Time measurements can be made from
the display in
the convention al manner . Sweep rate is determined by
the
setting of th e Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch .
U se the following procedure :
1 . Connect the signal to either input connector . Set the
Exam ple . F ig . 2-24 shows α complex waveform as d is-
MODE switch to disp lay the channel used .
played on the CRT . The circled portion of the waveform
cannot be viewed in any greater detail because the sweep is
triggered by the larger am plitude pu lses at the start of the
2 . Set the VO LTS/DI V
switch to display
about four
d isplay, and α faster sweep rate moves th is area of the wave-
divisions of the waveform .
form off the viewi ng area . The second waveform shows the
area of interest magnified 10 times using Delayed Sweep .
The DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial has been adjusted so
3 . Set the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch
to α sweep rate wh ich
the delayed sweep starts just before the area of interest .
displays the comp lete waveform .
2-37
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A
4 . Set the Α Triggering controls to obtain as stable α
d isp lay as possib le .
5 . Set
the H OR IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ DUR-
I NG Β and th e Β SWEEP MODE
switch to Β STARTS
AFTER DELAY TIME .
6 . Position the start of the
intensified portion with the
DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial so the pulse to be meas-
ured is intensified .
7. Set the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch to α setting wh ich inten-
sifies the full portion of the pu lse th at shows j itter.
8 . Set
the H O R IZ DIS PLAY switch to Β (DELAYE D
Fig . 2-25 . Meas u ring pu lse jitter .
SWEEP) .
9 . Pulse
j itter is shown by horizontal movemen t of
the
pu lse (ta k e
into account
inherent
j itter of Delayed Sweep) .
M easure the amount of horizontal movement . Be sure both
variab le controls are set to the calibrated position .
10 . M ultiply th e d istance measured in step 11 by the Β
ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch setting to obtain pu lse jitter i n time .
Example . Assu me that the horizontal movement
is 0.5
division (see F ig . 2-25), and the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch setting
is .5 μs .
U sing the form ula :
6 . The du ration of the Β GAT E signal
is determined by
Su bstitu ting th e given val u e :
the setting of the Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch .
Pulse Jitter = 0.5 Χ 0.5 μs
7 . The external equipment will be triggered at the start
The pu lse jitter is 0.25 microsecond .
of
the intensified portion
if
it responds to positive-going
2-38
Delayed Trigger Generator
The
Β GAT E ou tput
signal can be used
to trigger an
external device at α selected delay time after the start of Α
Sweep . The delay time of the Β GATE ou tpu t signal can be
selected by the setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPL I ER
dial and Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch .
Α Sweep Triggered Internally . When Α sweep is triggere d
internally to p roduce α normal display, the delayed trigger
may be obtained as follows .
1 . Obtain α triggered disp lay
in the normal manner .
2 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Α ΙΝΤΕΝ D UR-
ING Β .
3 . Select the amou nt of delay from the start of Α Sweep
with the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER dial . Delay time can
be calculated in the normal manner .
4 .
Set
the
Β
SWEEP M OD E
switch
to Β STA RTS
AF TER DELAY TIME .
horizontal
Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
Pu lse J itter =
j itter
Χ
setting
5 .
Connect
the Β GATE signal to the external
equip-
(d ivisions)
ment .
at the end of the intensified portion
if
it re-
nals may be of opposite polarity d ue to 180° phase differ-
sponds to negative-going triggers .
ence ; if so, take th is
i n to account in the final calculation .)
Α Sweep Triggered Externally . Th is mode of operation
6 . Set th e C H
1 and C H 2 VO LTS/DI V switches and the
can be used to prod u ce α d elayed trigger with or wit h out α
VA R VO LTS/DI V controls so the disp lays are equal and
corresponding d isplay . Connect th e external
trigger signal
about five d ivisions in am plitude .
to
th e Α ΕΧΤ TR IG
I NPU T connector and set
the Α
SO URCE switch to EXT . F ollow the operation given above
to obtain the delayed trigger .
7 . Set the triggering controls to obtain α sta ble display .
Normal Trigger Generator
8 . Set the ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch to α sweep rate wh ich dis-
Ordinarily, the
signal to be displayed also provides the
plays about one cycle of the waveform .
trigger signal for the oscilloscope . In some instances, it may
be desirable to reverse th is situ ation and h ave the oscillo-
9, Move
th e waveforms to the center of th e graticule
scope trigger th e signal source . Th is can be d one by connec-
w it h th e vertical POSITION controls .
ting th e Α GATE
signal to th e input of the signal sou rce .
Set the Α LEVEL control fully clockwise, Α SWEEP M OD E
switch to AUTO TR IG, and adju st the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch
10 . Turn
the Α VA R
control until
one cycle of the
for the desired display . Since the signal source is triggered
α signal
that h as α fixed time relations h ip to the sweep,
reference signal (Channel 1) occup ies exactly eight d ivisions
by
the output of
the
signal source can be displayed on the
horizontally
(see F ig . 2-26) . Each division of th e gratic u~le
CRT as th ou gh the 453Α were triggered in the normal man-
rep resents 45
of
th e cycle (360
- 8 divisions = 45
/
division) .
(th is meth od d oes not allow selection of trigger level or
ision) . The sweep rate can be stated in terms of degrees
as 45/division .
co u pling) .
11 . Measu re
th e horizontal d ifference between
corre-
Multi-Trace Phase Difference Measurements
spond ing points on the waveforms .
Phase comparison between two signals of the same fre-
quency can be made using
the d u al-trace feat u re of
the
453Α . Th is meth od of phase difference measurement can
be used up to the frequency limit of the vertical system . To
ma k e the comparison, use the following procedu re .
1 . Set the In put Coupling switches to the same position,
depend ing on the type of cou pling desired .
Channel l
Channel2
2 . Set
th e M OD E
switc h to either CH O P or ALT .
In
(refere nce)
(lagging)
general, C HOP
is more suitable for low-frequency signals
and th e A LT position
is more suitable for h igh-frequency
signals . M ore information on determining the mode is given
u nd er Dual-Trace Operation in th is section .
22
3 . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to C H
1 O R Χ-Y .
4 . Connect the reference signal to the CH
1 OR Χ con-
nector and the comparison signal to the C H 2 O R Υ con-
nector . The reference signal should precede the com parison
signal
in time . U se coaxial cables or probes wh ich have
equal time d elay to connect the signals to the input connec-
tors .
5 .
If
th e
signals
are of
opposite polarity,
pull
the
I NVER T switch out to invert the Channel 2 display . (Sig-
F ig . 2-26 . Meas uring phase difference .
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A
12 .
Mu lti ply
the
measu red d istance
(in d ivisions) by
45°/d ivision
(sweep rate) to obtain the exact amount of
phase d ifference .
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
Horizon tal
ι
ι
Differe nce
ι
ι
8 Division s
ι
Ί
(360°)
1
1
2-39
Operating Instructions-453 Α/R453A
Example . Assume α horizontal difference of 0.6 division
Sub stituting the given valu es :
with α sweep rate of 45°/division as shown in Fig . 2-26 .
Phase Difference = 6 Χ 4.5 °
U sing the form u la
:
The phase difference is 27 ° .
horizontal
Ph ase Difference = difference Χ
sweep rate
(d ivisions)
(degrees/div)
X-Y Phase Measurements
Su bstituting the given values :
Phase Difference = 0 .6 Χ 45°
The phase difference is 27 ° .
H igh Resolution Phase Measurements
More
accurate d u al-trace phase
measurements can be
made by increasing the sweep rate (without changing the Α
VA R control setting) . One of the easiest ways to
increase
th e sweep rate
is with the MAG
switch . Delayed sweep
magnification may also be u sed. Th e magnified sweep rate
is determined by d ividing the sweep rate obtained previ-
ously by the amoun t of sweep magnification .
Example .
If th e sweep rate were increased 10 times with
the
magnifier,
th e magnified
sweep rate would be 45°/
division _
10 = 4.5 ° /d ivision . F ig .
2-27
shows the same
signals as used in F ig . 2-26 but with the MAG switch set to
Χ 10 . W it h α horizontal difference of six divisions, the phase
difference is :
2-40
horizontal
magnified
Phase Difference = difference Χ
sweep rate
(division s)
(degrees/div)
Channel l
(reference)
Channel 2
ιFΑ,ι'ιιι~!==FAOMM
MEMOME
EMENEEMEME
MOMMEMEMEM
Ι
Ι
.6
Horizon tal
01
Ι
difference
Ι
F ig .
2-27 . High resolution phase-difference measu rement with
i n-
creased sweep rate .
Th e X-Y ph ase measuremen t meth od can be used to
measure
th e phase d ifference between two signals of
the
same
frequency .
Th is
meth od
provides
an
alternative
meth od of measurement for signal frequencies up to about
100 kilohertz . H owever, above th is frequency the
inherent
phase d ifference between
the vertical and horizontal sys-
tems makes accurate phase measu reme nts difficult . In th is
mode,
one
of
the sine-wave
signals provides h orizontal
deflection
( Χ ) wh ile the oth er signal provides the vertical
deflection
( Υ ) . The phase angle between th e two signals can
be d etermined from the lissa jous pattern as follows :
1 . Connect one of the sine-wave signals to both the CH
1
OR Χ and th e CH
2 O R Υ connectors .
(N ote :
steps
1
through 5 measure inherent ph ase d ifference between the Χ
and Υ amplifiers
to provide α more accurate X-Y phase
measurement ;
not necessary below abou t 1 kHz)
.
2 . Set the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch to Χ-Y . Set th e ΙΝΤ
T R IG switch to CH
1 O R X-Y and the Β SOUR CE switch
to
Ι NT .
3 . Position th e d isplay to the center of the screen and
adjust the VO LTS/DI V switches to produce α display less
than
six d ivisions vertically
(Υ ) and less than 10 divisions
h orizontally
( Χ ) . The CH
1 VO LTS/DI V switch controls
the horizontal deflection
(Χ ) and the CH 2 VO LTS/DI V
switch controls the vertical deflection
( Υ ) .
4 . Center th e display in relation to the vertical graticule
line . M easure th e distances Α and Β as sh own in F ig . 2-28 .
Distance Α is th e h orizontal measurement between the two
points wh ere the trace crosses the center horizontal
line .
Distance Β is the maximum h orizontal width of the d isplay.
5 .
Divide Α by Β to obtain the sine of the phase angle
(φ ) between the two signals . The angle can then be obtained
from α trigonometric table . Th is is the inherent phase sh ift
of the instrument .
6 .
Connect
th e Υ
signal to CH
2 O R Υ connector .
Repeat steps 2 th rough 5 to measure phase angle .
If th e
d isp lay
appears as α diagonal
straight line, th e two signals
are either in phase (tilted u pper righ t to lower left) or 180 °
out of phase (tilted u pper left to lower righ t) . If th e d isplay
Fig. 2-28 . Phase-difference measurement from an Χ -Υ d isplay .
MEMEMEMEME
7 . Subtract the inherent phase sh ift from the phase angle
φ to obtain the actual phase difference .
Example . Assume an
inherent phase difference of 2°
with α d isplay as shown in F ig . 2-28 where Α is 5 divisions
and Β is 10 d ivisions .
U sing the formula
:
is α circle, the signals are 90° out of phase . F ig . 2-29 shows
the
lissa j ous d isp lays produced
between
0°
and
360° .
From the trigonometric tables :
Notice th at above 180° phase sh ift, the resu ltant disp lay is
the same as at some lower angle .
φ = 300
Sub stituting the given val u es :
Sine 0 = ό = 0.5
Operating Instrucltions-453Α/R453A
Sine φ = ΑΒ
F ig . 2-29 . Phase of lissa jous d isplay . (Α ) 0° or 360° , (Β ) 30 ° or 330 ° , (C) 90' or 270 ° , (D) 150 ° or 210 ° ,
( Ε ) 180° .
2-41
I nstructions-453Α/R 453A
Common- Mode Re jection
5 . Set the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch to NO RM .
The ADD feature of th e 453Α can be u sed to display
signals
wh ich
contain
undesirable
components .
These
und esirable
com ponents
can
be
eliminated
through
common-mode rejection . The precautions given under Alge-
braic Add ition sh ou ld be observed .
1 . Connect the signal containing both the desired and
undesired information to the C H
1 O R Χ connector .
2 . Connect α sign al similar to the unwanted portion of
the Channel
1
signal to the C H 2 O R Υ connector . For
exam p ie, in Fig . 2-30 α line-freq ue ncy sign al
is co nnected to
Channel 2 to cancel out the line-frequency component of
the Channel
1 signal .
6 . Set
the MOD E switch
to ADD .
Pull
the
I NVER T
switch so the common-mo de signals are of opposite polar-
ity .
7 . Ad just th e CH 2 VOLTS/DI V switch and CH 2 VAR
control for maximum
cancellatio n of the common-mode
signal .
8 . The signal wh ich remains shou ld be only the desired
portion of
the Chan nel
1
signal . The u ndesired signal
is
cancelled ou t.
3 . Set bot h
I nput Coupling switch es to DC (AC if DC
Example . An examp le
of
th is mode of operation
is
component of input signal is too large) .
shown in Fig . 2-30 . Th e signal applied to Chann el
1 con -
tains unwanted line-frequency components
( F ig . 2-30Α ) . Α
corresponding line-frequ ency signal is connected to Channel
4 . Set the MODE switch to A LT . Set the VO LTS/DI V
2
( Fig . 2-30Β ) . F ig . 2-30C shows the desired portion of the
switches so the signals are about equ al in am plitude .
signal as d isplayed wh en common-mode re jection is used .
MEMMEMEMOM MEMMEMEMEMEMEMEMEMS
WMΕιιιι
=WDEιER
N-0
----.
ιιίιιιιιιι ιιιιιιιιιι
ιιιιιιιιιι
ιιιιιιιιιι NOONιιιιιι
ιιιιιιιιιι
Fr LL
-
Fig . 2-30 . Usi ng the ADD feat ure for common-mode re jection .
(Α ) Channel
1 sig n al con tains desired information along with line-frequency
com ponen t, (Β ) Channel 2 sig n al contains line-frequency only, (C) CRT display u sing common -mode re jection .
Change information, ifany, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
453Α/R453A
Introduction
Axis Am plifier
circuit to b lank out the between-cha nn el
switch ing
transients when
in the chopped mode of opera-
tion . Α trigger-p ickoff stage at the output of the V ertical
circuitry
used
in
the 453Α Oscilloscope . The description
Switching
circuit
p rovid es
α
sam ple
of
the
displayed
begins with α d iscussion of the instrument using the basic
signal(s) to the Trigger Preamp circuit .
block d iagram
shown
in Fig .
3-1 . Then , eac h circuit
is
describe d in detail, using α d etailed block d iagram to show
the interconnections between
the stages in eac h major cir-
cuit and the relations hip of th e front-panel controls to the
The
output of
the Vertical Switching
circuit
is con
ind ivid ual stages .
nected to
the Vertical Output Amplifier through the Delay
Line . The V ertical Output Am plifier circuit provides the
final amplification for the signal before it is connected to
Α com plete block d iagram
is located
in the Diagrams
the vertical deflection plates of
the C RT . T h is circuit in-
section at the rear of th is manual . T h is block d iagram shows
cludes the BEAM FIN DER switch wh ich com presses the
the overall
relationsh i p between
all of the circuits . Com-
vertical and horizontal deflection with in the viewing area to
plete schematics of each circuit are also given in the Dia-
aid in locating an off-screen display .
grams section .
Refer
to
these diagrams
throughout
the
following
circuit
d escription
for
electrical
values
and
relationsh ip .
T he Trigger Preamp circuit provides am plification for
the internal trigger signal selected by the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch .
Th is
internal
trigger
signal
is selecte d
from
either
the
BLOCK DIAG R AM
Chann el
1 Vertical Pream p circuit or the Vertical Switch ing
circuit . O utput from th is circuit is connected to the Α Trig-
General
ger Generator circuit and the Β Trigger Generator circuit .
The following discussion
is provided to
aid
in und er-
stand i ng the overall concept of the 453Α before the
ind i-
The Α and Β Trigger Generator circuits prod uce an out-
vid ual circuits are discussed
in detail . Α basic block d iagram
put pulse wh ich initiates the sweep signal prod uced by the
of the 453Α
is shown
in
F ig . 3-1 . Only the basic
inter-
Α or Β Sweep Generator circuits . The in put signal to the Α
connections between
the
ind ividual block s are
shown on
and Β Trigger Generator circuits can be ind ivid ually selec-
th is d iagram . Each b lock represents α major circuit within
ted from the
i nternal trigger signal from the Trigger Preamp
th is instrument . T he number on each block
refers to the
circuit, an external signal applied to the ΕΧΤ T R IG
I NPU T
com plete circuit diagram w h ich is located at the rear of th is
connector, or α samp le of the
line voltage app lied to the
manual .
instrument .
Each
trigger
circu it
contains
level,
slope,
coupling, and source controls.
Signals to be d isplayed on the C RT are app lied to either
the CH
1 O R Χ a nd /or the CH 2 OR Υ connectors . The
The Α Sweep Generator circuit prod uces α
linear saw-
in put signals are then amplified by the Channel
1 Vertical
tooth output signal when initiated by the Α Trigger Gen-
Pream p and/or
the Channel
2 Vertical Preamp circuits .
erator circuit . The slope of the sawtoot h produced by the Α
Each Vertical P reamp circuit
includes separate vertical de-
Sweep Generator circuit
is controlled by
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
flection
factor, position,
input
coupling,
gain,
variable
switch . The operating mod e of the Α Sweep Generator cir-
attenuation, and balance controls . Α trigger-pickoff stage in
cuit
is controlled by th e Α SWEEP MODE switch . In the
the Channel 1 Vertical Preamp circuit supplies α sam ple of
AUTO T R IG position, the absence of an adeq uate trigger
the C hannel
1
signal
to the Trigger Preamp circuit or the
signal causes
the sweep to
free run . In the NO RM T R IG
CH
1
O UT
connector . The C hannel 2 Vertical P reamp
position, α horizontal sweep is presented only when cor-
circuit contains an invert feature to invert the Channel 2
rectly triggered by an adequate trigger signal
. The SI NG LE
signal as displayed on the C RT . The output of both Vertical
SWEEP position allows o ne
(and only one) sweep to be
Pream p circuits
is connected
to
the Vertical Switch ing
initiated after the circu it is reset with the RESET button .
circuit . Th is circu it selects th e channel(s) to be displayed .
The Α Swee p Generator circuit also produces an unblanking
An output signal from th is circuit
is connected to the Ζ
gate signal to unblan k the C RT so the display can be pre-
sented . Th is gate
signal
is
coi n cid ent with the sawtoot h
calibration
of
the
instrument
and
the compensation of
produced by th e Α Sweep Generator circuit . Α gate signal,
probes . The PR OBE
LOOP provides an accurate current
wh ich
is also coincid ent wit h th e sawtoot h , is available at
source for calibration of current-measuring probe systems .
the Α GATE connector on the
side panel . T he Α Sweep
Generator
circuit also prod uces an alternate sync pulse,
wh ich
is connected to the Vertical Switch ing circuit . Th is
CI RC U IT OPERATIO N
pulse switch es
the d isplay between ch annels at th e end of
each sweep when
the MOD E switch is in the A LT position .
General
The Β Sweep Generator circuit
is basically the same as
the Α Swee p Generator circuit . H owever, th is circuit only
prod uces α sawtooth output signal after α delay time deter-
mined by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch and
the DELAY-TIME
MULTIPL I ER d ial . If the Β SWEEP MODE switch is set to
the
Β STA RTS A FT ER DELAY TIME position,
the Β
Sweep Generator begins to produce the sweep immed iately
following the selected delay time .
If th is switch is
i n the
TR IGG E RABLE A F TER DELAY TIME position,
the Β
Sweep Generator circuit does not prod uce α sweep until it
receives α trigger pulse from the Β Trigger Generator circuit
after the selected d elay time .
The output of eit h er the Α or Β Sweep Generator circuit
is amplified by the H orizontal Amplifier circuit to produce
h orizontal d eflection
for the C RT
in all positions of the
HO R IZ DISPLAY switch except Χ-Y . Th is circuit contains
α 10 times magnifier to increase the swee p rate ten times in
any Α or Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch position . Other horizontal
deflection
signals
can
be
connected
to
the H orizontal
Amplifier by using
the Χ -Υ mode of operation . When the Β
SOUR CE switch is set to ΙΝΤ , the Χ signal is connected to
the Horizontal Amplifier circuit through the CH
1 Vertical
Preamp circuit, the Trigger Pream p circuit and the Β Trigger
Generator circuit
(HO R IZ DISPLAY switch set to Χ-Y, Β
SOURCE switch set to ΙΝΤ , and the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch set
to CH
1 O R Χ-Y) . In the ΕΧΤ or ΕΧΤ = 10 position of the
Β SO UR CE switch ,
the Χ signal
is obtained from α signal
connected to the Β ΕΧΤ T R IG OR Χ
I NPU T connector .
Circuit Description-453Α/ R453A
Th is section provides α detailed descri ption of the elec-
trical operation and relationsh ip of the circuits in th e 453Α .
The theory of operation for circuits uniq ue to th is instru-
ment
is described in detail
i n th is d iscussion . Circu its w h ich
are commonly
used
i n
the electronics
ind ustry are not
d escribe d in d etail . If more information
is desired on these
commonly used
circuits, refer to th e following textbooks :
Tektronix
Circuit
Concepts Books
(order from your
local Tektronix F ield Office or representative) .
Cat hod e- R ay
Tubes,
Te k tronix
P art
No .
062-0852-01 .
Horizontal Am plifier Circuits,
Tektronix Part No .
062-1144-00 .
Oscillosco pe Trigger Circuits, Tektronix Part No . 062-
1056-00 .
Power Supp ly
Circuits,
Tektronix
Part No .
062-
0888-01
.
Sweep Generator
Circuits, Tektron ix Part No . 062-
1098-01 .
Vertical Am plifier Circuits, Tek tronix Part No . 062-
1145-00 .
Ph illip
Cutler,
"Semiconductor
Circuit
Analysis",
McGraw-H ill, New York , 1964 .
The Ζ Axis Amp lifier circuit determines the CR T inten-
L loyd
Ρ . H u nter (Ed .), " Handbook of Semiconductor
sity and blank ing . The Ζ Axis Am plifier
circuit sums the
E lectronics", second edition, McGraw-H ill, New York ,
current
in puts
from
the
I N TENSITY
control, Vertical
1962 .
Switch ing circuit (chopped blank ing), Α and Β Sweep Gen-
erator
circuits
(unblank ing),
and
the
external
Ζ AXIS
Jacob M illman and H erbert Taub, "Pulse, Digital, and
I NPUT bind ing post . The output level of the Ζ Axis Am pli-
Switching Waveforms", McGraw-H ill, N ew York , 1965 .
fier circuit controls
th e trace intensity through the C RT
Circuit . The CR T Circuit provides the voltages and contains
the controls
necessary
for operation of
the cathode-ray
T he following
circuit
analysis
is written
around
the
tube .
detailed block d iagrams wh ich are given for each major cir-
cuit . T hese detailed block d iagrams give the names of the
individ ual stages within the ma jor circuits and
show how
The
Power
Su pply
circuit
provides
the
low-voltage
they are connected together to form the major circuit . T he
power
necessary
for operation
of
th is instrument . Th is
block diagrams also
show the in puts and outputs for each
voltage is d istributed to all of the circuits in th is instrument
circuit and
the relations h i p of the front- panel controls to
as shown by the Power Distrubution d iagram . The Calibra-
the individ ual stages . Th e circuit d iagrams from wh ich the
for circu it produces α square-wave out put with accurate
detailed block diagrams are derived are shown in the Dia-
am plitude and frequency wh ich can be used to check the
grams section .
3-3
Circu it Description-453Α/R453A
NOTE
from passing to the amplifier . The G N D position opens the
signal path and the in put to the amplifier is connected to
Α // references to direction of current in this manual
ground . Th is provides α ground reference without the need
are in terms ofconventional current; i.e., from plus to
to d iscon nect the applied signal from
the CH
1 connector .
minus.
Resistor R2, connected across the
input coupling switch,
allows C1
to be precharged
in the GND position so
the
trace remai n s on screen when switched to the AC position
CHANNEL 1 VERTICA L PREAMP
with α high DC level app lied .
General
Input signals for vertical deflection on the C RT can be
connected to the CH 1 O R Χ connector . In
the Χ -Υ mode
of o peration , th is input signal provides the horizo ntal (X-
axis) deflection
(HO R IZ
DISPLAY switch set to Χ-Y, Β
SOURC E switch set to ΙΝΤ , and ΙΝΤ TR IG switch set to
C H 1 O R Χ ) . The Channel
1 Vertical Pream p circuit pro-
vides control of in put coupling, vertical deflection factor,
balance, vertical position, and vertical gain . It also contains
α stage to provide α sample of the Channel 1
i nput signal to
the Trigger Preamp circuit to provide internal triggering
from the Channel
1
sig nal only . F ig . 3-2 shows α detailed
block diagram of the Channel
1 Vertical Preamp circuit . Α
schematic of th is circuit is shown on d iagram
1 at the rear
of th is manual .
For the CH 1 VOLTS/DI V switch positions above 20
Input Cou pl i ng
mV, the attenuators are switched into the circuit singly or
in pairs to produce the vertical deflection factor indicated
Input signals applied to the CH 1 O R Χ connector can be
on
th e
front
panel .
These
attenuators
are
frequency-
AC-coupled , DC-coupled , or internally disconnected . When
com pensated voltage dividers . For DC and low-frequency
Input Coupling switch S1
is in the DC position, the input
signals, they are primarily resistance d ividers and the volt-
signal
is coupled directly to the Input Atten uator stage . In
age attenuation
is determined by the resistance ratio in the
the AC position, the input signal passes through capacitor
circuit . The reactance of the ca pacitors in the circuit
is so
C1 . This capacitor prevents the DC com ponent of the signal
high at low frequencies that their effect
is negligible . How-
3-4
S5
Input Attenuator
The effective overall Channel
1 d eflection factor of the
453Α is determined by the CH 1 VOLTS/DI V switch. In all
positions of the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V switch above 20 mV,
the basic deflection factor of the V ertical Deflection Sys-
tem
is 20 millivolts per division of C R T d eflection . To
in-
crease this basic deflection factor to the values indicated on
the front panel, precision attenuators are switched into the
circuit . In the 5 and 10 mV positions, input attenuation is
not used.
Instead , the gain of the Feedback Amplifier
is
changed
to decrease
the deflection factor
(see Feedback
Am plifier d iscussion ) .
Fig . 3-2 . Channel 1 Vertical Preamp detailed block diagram .
Ι
~rτ Channel 1
signal to
R75
Amplifier
Vertical
VAR
Q84,
η94,
Switching
circuit
Circuit Descri ption-453Α/R453A
ever,
at h igher frequencies,
the reactance of the capacitors
selected to provide th e same amplitude AC and DC signal at
d ecreases and the attenuator becomes primarily α εαραε-
the base of Q33. C24 couples high-freq uency
i nformation
itance voltage d ivider
.
to the
junction of R25-R26, thereby reducing the load ing
at the base of Q43.
In add ition to provid ing constant attenuation at all fre-
quencies with in the bandwidth of the instrument, the Input
Feedback Amplifier
Attenuators are designed to maintain
the same in put RC
characteristics (one megohm Χ 20 p F) for each setting of
Feedback Amplifier Q34 and Q54 changes the overall
the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V switch . Each attenuator contains an
gain of the Channel
1 Vertical P ream p to provide the cor-
adj ustable series capacitor to provide correct attenuation at
rect deflection factor in the 5 and 10 mV positions of the
hig h-freq uencies and an ad j ustable shunt ca pacitor to pro-
CH
1 VO LTS/DI V switch . Gain of th is stage is determined
vide correct input capacitance .
by the ratio of R46- R 50 to R 43, R 44, or R45
. In the 5 mV
position
of the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V
switch , the network
C43A-C43 B -C43C-C43D-C43 E -L 43A-R43A- R 43C-R 43E
is
In put Stage
connected
into the emitter circuit of Q34. The ratio be-
tween
R46-R50 and
R43 provides α gain of about 10 .
The Channel 1 signal from
the In put Attenuator is con-
C43A, C43C, L 43A, and R43C are adjustable to provide
nected to th e Input Stage through the network C17-C18-
hig h -freq uency peaking for the network . In the 10 mV posi-
C20- R 16- R 17-R 18- R 19- R 20-R 21 . R 16, R 17, and R20 pro-
tion, conditions are
th e same
except
that the networ k
vide the input resistance for this stage. These resistors are
C44A-C44B-C44C-L 44A-R44A-R 44B -R 44C
is
connected
part of the attenuation network at all CH
1 V O LTS/DIV
into the circuit in place of the previous network . The ratio
switch positions. Variable capacitor C17 ad j usts the basic
between R 46-1350 and R44 provides α gain of about five
input time constant for α nominal value of one megohm Χ
times
in
this CH
1 V OLTS/DIV
switch
position . C44C
20 picofarads . The divider action of R16- R 17-R 20 allows
and
R 44C
p rovid e
h ig h
fre
q uency
pea k ing for
this
about 98%ο of DC and low-frequency signals to pass to the
network .
In the 20 mV and
h igher C H
1 VO LTS/DI V
gate of FET (field-effect transistor) Q23A . C18, with the
switch positions, the gain of the Feedback Amp lifier
is
stray capacitance in the circuit, forms an AC divid er which
about 2.5 as estab lished by the ratio between R 46-R 50 and
maintains th is same voltage division for high-freq uency sig-
R45 . Ad j ustable ca pacitor C45A p rovides h igh-frequency
nals . R18
limits the current d rive to the gate of Q23A .
peaking for the
Feedback Amplifier stage. C49 and R49
Diode C R 18 protects the circuit by clamping the gate of
provid e h igh-frequency damping for the circuit . As men-
Q23A at about -12 .5 volts
if α h igh -amplitud e negative
tioned previously, th e STEP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L ad justment is set
signal is a pplied to the CH 1 O R Χ connector . Over-voltage
to provide zero volts at th e emitter of Q34when the input
protection for h igh -am plitud e positive signals is provid ed by
is at zero volts. Since there is no voltage difference across
forward conduction of Q23A . Th is current path is th rough
emitter resistor R43, R44, or R45, changing the value of
R 23, L23, C R 36, and CR 37 .
the resistance d oes not change the current in the circuit .
T h erefore,
the
trace
position
will
not
change when
switch ing between the 5 mV , 10 mV , and 20 mV positions
of the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V switch if the ST EP ΑΤΤΕΝ BA L
FET Q23B
is α constant current source for Q23A and
control is correctly ad justed .
also provides tem perature compensation for Q23A . ST EP
ΑΤΤΕΝ BAL ad j ustment R30 varies the gate level of Q23B
to provid e α zero-volt level at th e emitter of Q34 with no
signal a pplied . With α zero-volt level at the emitter of Q34,
V ertical
position
of the trace
is determined
by
the
the trace position will not change w hen switch ing between
setting of POSITIO N co ntrol R40 . This control changes the
the 5, 10, and 20 mV positions of the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V
current into the emitter of Q34, α low-impedance point,
switch .
whic h
results
in
negligible voltage change at th is point .
However, the change
in current from the POSITION con-
trol prod uces α resultant DC voltage at the output of the
DC and low-frequency signals are connected from
the
F eedback Amp lifier stage to change the vertical position of
source of Q23A to the Feed back Amplifier th rough R 23,
the trace. C H
1 Position Center adjustment R55 is adjusted
L23, Q33, and R39 . L23 isolates the base of Q33 from the
to provid e α centered display when
the Channel
1 POSI
source of FET Q23A . Diodes C R 34-CR 35 and CR 36-C R37
ΤΙΟΝ control is centered (with α zero-volt DC
input level) .
limit the d ynamic range of the signal at the base of Q33 and
prevent th e following stages from being damaged by α large
voltage swing at the source of Q23A . T he signal path for
Zener diode VR53 provides α low-impedance current
hig h -freq uency signals is through C23, Q43, and C39. H ig h -
source for Q54. Variable capacitor C54 provid es feedback
freq uency signals at the emitter of Q43 are connected to
from the collector to th e base of Q54 for amplifier stab ili-
the base of Q33 through C38 . Th is allows Q33 to be d riven
zation . The output signal
from the F eedback Amp lifier
at h igh frequencies wh ile preventing the base circuitry of
stage is connected to the Para phase Amplifier stage and the
Q33 from capacitively loading the input FET, Q23A . C38 is
Channel 1 Trigger Pickoff stage.
3-5
Circu it Descri ption-453Α/R453A
Channel 1 Trigger P ίckoff
Q84 and Q94 are connected as α common-emitter phase
The
signal
at
the collector of Q54
in the Feedback
inverter (paraphase amplifier) to convert the single-end ed
Amplifier stage is connected to the Channel 1 Trigger Pick-
In put signal to α push-pull output signal . Gai n of this stage
off stage
through C R58 and R59. This sam ple of the
is determined by the emitter degeneration . As the resistance
Channel 1 input signal provides internal triggering from the
between the emitters of Q84 and Q94 increases, emitter
Channel
1
signal or X-axis deflection for Χ-Υ operation.
degeneratio n increases also to result
in less gain through the
Q63 is connected as an emitter follower to provide isolation
stage. GAIN ad justment R90 varies the resistance between
the emitters to control the overall gai n of the Ch annel 1
between the Trigger Preamp circuit and the Feedback Am-
Vertical P rea
plifier stage . It also provides α minimum load for the Feed-
back Amplifier stage and α low output imped ance to the
Trigger Preamp circuit . CR58 provides thermal compensa-
CHANNEL 2 VERTICAL PREAMP
tion for Q63. CH
1 Trigger DC Level adj ustment R60 sets
the DC level at the base of Q63 for α zero-volt DC output
General
level from the Trigger Preamp circuit when the Channel
1
The Channel 2 Vertical Preamp circuit is basically the
trace
is centered vertically . Output from
the Channel
1
same as the Channel 1 Vertical Pream p circuit. Only the
Trigger Pickoff stage
is connected to the Trigger Preamp
differences between the two circuits are described here .
circuit through ΙΝΤ T R IG switch S230B .
Portions of this
circuit not described
in
the following
description o perate in the same man ner as for the Channel
,
1 Vertical Pream p circuit (corresponding circuit numbers
Paraphase Amplifier
assigned
in the 100-199 range) . F ig . 3-3 shows α detailed
The output signal from the Feedback Amplifier stage is
block diagram of the Channel 2 Vertical Pream p circuit . Α
connected to the Paraphase Amplifier stage th rough VAR
schematic of this circuit is shown on diagram 3 at the rear
(variable) control R75. When the VAR control is set to the
of this manual .
cali brated
position
(fully
clockwise),
R75
is
effectively
by-passed and maximum signal current reaches the base of
Feedback Amplifier
Q84 . Switch S75, ganged with the VAR control, is open
and
the UN CAL neon bulb is disconnected . As the VAR
Basically, the Channel 2 Feedback Amplifier operates as
control
is rotated counterclockwise from the calibrated
described for Channel
1 . However, the Channel 2 Vertical
d etent, S75
is closed and UNCAL
light DS75 ignites to
Pream p circuit does not have α trigger pickoff stage . To
ind icate that the vertical deflection factor is uncalibrated .
provide α load at the collector of Q154 similar to the load
The signal applied to the base of Q84 is continuously re-
the Channel 1 Trigger P ickoff stage provid es at the collector
duced as the VAR control is rotated counterclockwise .
of Q54, C159 and R159 are co nnected into the circuit .
3-6
S105
Fig . 3-3. Channel 2 Vertical Preamp detaile d block diagram.
ι
ι
ι
Channel 2
1
Signal Το
Vertical
Switch ing
Circuit
ι
ι
ι
ι
Pream p output signals to be coup led to the Vertical Output
Am p lifier . CR 201 through C R 204 control the Channel
1
The basic C hann el 2 Paraphase Amp lifier configuration
output and CR 206 through CR209 control the Channel 2
and operation
is
the same as for C h annel
1 . However, IN-
output
.
These
d iodes
are
in
turn
controlled
by
the
VERT switch S195 has been add ed in the C hannel 2 circuit .
Switch ing Multivibrator for dual-trace displays, or by the
Th is switch allows the d isplayed signal from C hannel 2 to
MOD E switch for single-trace displays .
be inverted .
VERTICAL SWITCH I NG
volts
is app lied
to
the
junction of C R 207-CR 208
in the
C hannel 2
Diode Gate
through R 227
(see simplified d ia
General
gram
in F ig . 3-5) . Th is forward biases C R 207-C R 208 and
Th e Vertical Switch ing
circuit determines
if
the CH
1
reverse biases CR 206-C R209, since the input to th e Delay-
and/or the CH 2 Vertical Preamp output signal is connected
L ine Driver stage
is
at about -5 .8 volts . C R 206-C R 209
to the Vertical Output Amp lifier circuit (through the Delay
block the Channel 2 signal so it cannot pass to th e Delay-
L ine Driver and Delay L ine stages) . In the ALT and C HOP
L ine Driver stage . At the same time,
in the Channel
1 Diode
positions of
the MOD E switch , both channels are
alter-
Gate, CR202-C R203
are
connected
to
ground
through
nately displayed on α shared-time basis . F ig . 3-4 shows α
8212 .
C R 202-C R203
are
held
reverse
biased w h ile
detailed b lock diagram of the Vertical Switching circuit . Α
C R201-C R 204 are forward biased . Therefore, the C hannel
schematic of th is circuit is shown on d iagram 5 at the rear
1 signal passes to the Delay-L ine Driver stage .
of th is manual .
CH 2 .
In the CH 2 position of the MODE switch , the
above cond itions are reversed . C R 202-C R203 are connected
Diode Gates
to -12 volts th roug h R 217 and C R 207-C R208 are con nec-
ted to ground through R222 . The Channel
1
Diode Gate
The Diod e Gates, consisting of four diod es each , can be
blocks th e signal and the C hannel 2 Diode Gate allows it to
thought of as switches wh ich allow either of the Vertical
pass .
Channel l
signal
from
Channel l
Vertical
Preamp
Channel 2
sign al
from
Channel 2
Vertical
Preamp
Alternate
trace sy nc
pu lse from
0
01
Α Sweep
Ge nerator
CH
1 .
In the CH
1 position of the MODE switch , -12
F ig . 3-4 . Vertical Switching detailed bloc k diagram .
Circuit Description-453Α/ R453A
N ormal Trigger
Pickoff
Network
Normal
0- (composite)
trigger sign al to
Trigger Preamp
Delay-
Vertical
L ine Driver
signal to
Q24,
Delay
Q294
Line
Chopped
blan k ing
to Ζ Axis
Amplifier
3-7
Sign al in from
Chan nel 1 Ver tical
Preamp
Signal
in from
Chann el 2 Vertical
Preamp
3-8
R212
R222
*ΟCR202 CR201
R217 Ζ
Ζ R211
R221 Ζ
Ζ R227
\
S230A
-12 ν
\_ - -
MnnF 1-- _ _ -/
-12 ν
CR206
VCR207
Chann el 1 Diode Gate
Signal path
Reverse-biased diode
To
Delay-L ine
Driver
F ig . 3-5 . Effect of Diode Gates on sign al path (simplified Ve rtical Switch ing diagram) . Co nditions shown for CH 1 position of MOD E switch .
Switch i ng MUIt iV i brdtor
Q234
is off and holds the emitter of Q215 more negative
than the emitter of Q225 . Wh en both Q215 and Q225 were
ALT .
In th is mode of operation ,
the Switching M ulti-
off
the voltage at
their bases became approximately equal .
vibrator operates as α bistable multivibrator .
In the A LT
Now when Q234 comes back on,
the transistor with
the
position of the MOD E switch , -12 volts is app lied to the
most negative emitter will
start conducting first wit h
the
emitter of Alternate Trace Switch ing Am plifier stage Q234
resulting
negative movement
at
its collector holding
the
by
the MOD E
switch . Q234
is forward b iased to su pply
other transistor off . The conditions described previously are
current
to
the
"on"
Switch ing-Μυltivibrator
transistor
reversed ; now the Ch annel
1 Diode Gate
is reversed biased
through R 234,
and C R218 or CR 228 .
For examp le
if
and
the Ch annel
2
signal
passes
through the Chann el
2
Q225
is cond ucting, current
is su pp lied to Q225 through
Dio
de Gate .
R 228 . The current flow th rough collector resistors R221
and
R 222 d rops the C R207-C R208 cathode level negative
so the Channel 2 Diode Gate
is blocked as for Channel 1
Reference F eedback stage Q253 provides common-mode
only operation . The
signal passes through the Channel
1
voltage feedback from the Delay-Line Driver stage to allow
Diode Gate to the Delay-L ine Driver stage .
the diode gates to be switched with α minimum amplitude
switch ing signal . The emitter level of Q253 is co n nected to
the junction of the Switching Mu ltivibrator collector resis
The
alternate-trace
sync
pulse
is
applied
to
Q234
tors,
R211- R 212
and
R221- R222
through CR213
or
at the end of each sweep. Th is negative-going sync pulse
CR223 . The collector level of
the "on" Switch i ng Multi-
momentarily interrupts the current through Q234 and both
vibrator transistor is negative and either CR 213 or C R223 is
Q215 and Q225 are turned off. When Q234 turns on again
forward
biased . Th is
clamps
the
cathod e
level
of
the
after the
alternate-trace sync pulse,
the ch arge on C218
forward-biased
shunt d iodes in
the applicable Diode Gate
determi n es whether Q215 or Q225 conducts . For example,
about
0 .5 volt more negative than
the emitter
level
of
wh en Q225 was conducting, C218 was charged negatively
Q253 . The level at the emitter of Q253 follows the average
on
th e C R 218
side to
the
emitter
level
of
Q215 and
voltage level at the emitters of the Delay-L ine Driver stage .
positively on the CR 228
side . T h is charge
is stored while
The sh unt d iodes are clamped near their switching level and
therefore they can be switched very fast with α minimum
-12
volts app lied
to
their cathodes th rough R 260 and
am p litude switch ing signal . This maintains about the same
R270.
Since both signals are applied to
the
Delay-Line
current th rough th e Diode Gate shunt d iodes so they can be
Driver stage, the output signal
is the algebraic sum of the
switched
with
α
minimum
amplitud e
switch ing
signal,
signals on both Channel
1 and 2 .
regard less of the d eflection signal at the anodes of the shunt
diodes .
CHOP. In
the CH O P position of the MODE switch, the
Switch ing M ultivibrator
free
runs
as
an
astable
multi-
vibrator at about α 500-kH z rate . The emitters of Q215 and
Q225 are connected to -12 volts through R 218 and R228 .
At the time of turn-on, one of the transistors begins to
cond uct ; for example, Q225 . Q225 conducts the C hannel 2
current and prevents the Channel 2 signal from reach ing the
Delay-L ine Driver
stage . M eanwhile, th e Channel
1 Diode
Gate passes the Channel 1 signal to the Delay-Line Driver .
Delay-Line Driver
Circuit Description-453Α/R 453A
Output of the Diod e Gate stage is applied to Delay-Line
Driver stage Q284 and Q294 . Q284 and Q294 are con-
nected as operational amplifiers with feed back provided by
R268-13269 and R278- R279 and the delay-line compensa-
tion network . The delay-line compensation network , C261-
C262-C263-C264-C265-C266-R261-R262-R264- R 265, pro-
vides h ig h-frequency com pensation
for
the
Delay
Line .
R289-C289 in the collector circuit of Q284-Q294 im prove
the h ig h -frequency reverse termination of the Delay L ine .
Output of the Delay-L ine Driver stage is connected to the
Vertical Output Amplifier th rough the Delay L ine .
The frequency-determining components
in
the CHOP
mod e
are
C218-R218-R228 . Switching
action occurs
as
follows : When Q225
is on, C218 attem pts to charge to -12
Normal Trigger Pic koff Network
volts
through
R 218 . The
emitter of Q215 slowly goes
The
toward -12 volts as C218 charges . The base of Q215 is held
trigger
signal
for
NO RM
trigger
operation
is
obtained from the collector of Q284 . Normal Trigger DC
at
α
negative
point
determined
by
voltage
divid er
Level
adj ustment R285
sets the DC
level of the normal
R215-R224 between -12 volts and the collector of Q225 .
trigger output signal so the sweep is triggered at the zero-
When the emitter voltage of Q215 reaches α level slightly
level of the d isplayed signal when the Triggering LEVEL
more negative than its base, Q215 conducts . The collector
control is set to 0 . The normal trigger signal is connected to
level of Q215 goes negative
and pulls
the base of Q225
the Trigger Pream p through S230B . R294 and R295 pro-
negative also, through divider R214-R225, to cut Q225 off
vide the same DC load
for
allow Q215 to conduct . This action switches the Diode
r
as provided to Q284 by
Gate stage to connect the opposite half to the Delay-Line
the Normal Trigger Pickoff Network .
Driver stage . Again C218
begins
to charge towards -12
volts but
this time
th rough 8228 . The emitter of Q225
VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPL I F I ER
slowly goes negative as C218 charges, until Q225 turns on .
Q215 shuts off and the cycle begins again.
General
The Vertical Output Am plifier circuit provides the final
Diodes CR218 a nd C R228 have no effect in the CHO P
amplification for the vertical deflection signal . This circuit
mode . Q253 operates the same
in CHOP as
in ALT, to
includes
the Delay L ine and the BEAM F I N D ER switch .
allow
the Diode Gates
to
be switched with
α minimum
The BEAM F I ND ER switch compresses an overscanned d is
signal level .
play
with in
the viewing area when pressed
in . F ig . 3-6
shows
α detailed
block d iagram of
the Vertical
Output
Am plifier circuit . Α schematic of this circuit is shown on
Th e Cho pped Blank ing Amplifier stage, Q244, provides
d iagram 6 at the rear of th is manual .
an output pulse to the Ζ Axis Amplifier wh ich blanks out
the transition between the Channel 1 trace and the Chann el
2 trace . When the Switching M ultivibrator changes states,
Delay Line
the current through Τ241 momentarily changes . Α negative
Delay Line DL301
provides
approximately 140 ηαηο -
pulse
is applied to the base of Q244, to tu rn
it off . The
seconds delay for
the
vertical
signal
to allow the Sweep
width of
the pulse at the base of Q244 is determined by
Generator circuits time to initiate α sweep before the verti-
R241 and C241 . Q244 clips the signal applied to its base,
cal signal reaches the vertical deflection plates . This allows
and
the positive-going outpu t pulse, wh ich
is coincident
the
instrument
to display
the
lead ing edge of the signal
with trace switch ing,
is app lied
to the Ζ Axis Amp lifier
originating the trigger pulse w hen using internal triggering .
circuit through R245 .
ADD .
In
the ADD position of the MODE switch,
the
Phase Equalizer Network
Diode Gate stage allows both signals to pass to the Delay-
The Phase Equalizer N etwork
is com prised of L 301-
Line Driver stage . The Diode Gates are both held on by
1_302-1-311-C301-C302-C311-C312 . This network compen-
3-9
Fig . 3-6 . Vertical Output Amplifier detailed bloc k diagram .
Vertical
deflection
signal
to vertical
deflection
plates
sates for the phase distortion of the Delay Line . C303-13303
when large signals deflect the display off screen . Τ357 pro-
and C313-13313
in series with the base-emitter resistance of
vides
high-frequency
balance for
the Output Amplifier
Q304 and Q314 provide
the forward termination for the
stage . Q364 and Q374 provide the output signal voltage to
Delay L ine .
drive the C RT vertical d eflection plates . LR 367 and LR377
provid e damping for the leads connecting the output signal
to the deflection plates .
Q304 and Q314 are connected
as common-base amp li-
TR IGG ER PREAMP
fiers to provide α low
input impedance to properly ter-
minate the Delay L ine (along wit h the Phase Equalizer Net-
General
work ) .
It also provides isolation between the Delay L ine
and the following stages .
The Trigger Preamp circuit amplifies the internal trigger
signal to the
level necessary to d rive
the Α and Β Trigger
Generator circuits . Input signal for the Trigger P reamp cir
cuit
is either α sam ple of th e signal app lied to Channel
1 or
The output of Q304 and Q314 is connected to the bases
α sample of the composite vertical signal from the Vertical
of 0324 and Q334 . Th e network C326-C327-C328-C336-
Switching circuit . F ig . 3-7 shows α detailed b lock diagram
R328 provides h igh-freq uency peak ing to com pensate for
of the Trigger Pream p circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit is
th e capacitive loading of the d eflection plates on the output
shown on diagram 7 at the rear of th is manual .
stage . C328, C336, and R328 are adj ustable to provide opti-
mu m
response . BEAM F I NDER switch S330 red uces the
quiescent current of Q324 and Ο334, when pressed , to
compress an off-screen d isplay wit h in
the graticule area .
N ormally,
th e
collector
current
for Q324 and Q334
is
Input C ircu itry
su pp lied th roug h R 321, R322 and th e parallel combination
The internal
trigger signal from
the Vertical Deflection
of R323
a nd R333 . When S330
is pressed , -12-volts
is
System
is connected
to
the Trigger Preamp
through ΙΝΤ
connected
to
the collector
circuit
of Q324
and Q334
T R IG switch S230 B . When the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch is in the
th roug h R 332 . Th is reduces the collector potential of Ο324
NO RM position, the trigger signal
is α sample of the com-
and Q334 to
limit their dynamic range and compress the
posite vertical signal in
the Vertical Switching circuit . Th is
display vertically wit h in the graticule area . Although th is
signal
is obtained from
the collector of Q284 and
is
α
compressed d isplay
is nonlinear, it provides α method of
sample of the d isplayed channel (or channels for d ual-trace
locating α signal th at is off screen vertically d ue to incorrect
o peration) . Since
the signal source follows the dual-trace
positioning or deflection factor,
switch
i ng stage,
the N O RM trigger signal also includes the
chopped switch ing transients when o perating in the C HOP
mode .
When
the
ΙΝΤ
T R IG
switch
is
in
the N ORM
Ο344 and Q354 am plify the output of Q324 and Q334 .
position, the C H
1
lights DS400 and DS401
are d iscon-
The sig nal at the collectors of 0344 and Ο354 is app lied to
nected . Also,
the sample of the Channel
1
signal
is con-
t he
out p ut
tran sistors,
Q364
and
Q374,
th rough
nected to th e C H
1 OU T connector . Th is output signal can
C344- R 344-VR 344, C354- R 354-VR 354, and Τ357 . VR 344
be used to monitor C hannel 1 or
it can be used to cascade
and VR 354 prevent saturation of Q344 and Q354 to im-
with Channel 2 to provide α one millivolt/d ivision minimum
prove the recovery of the Vertical Output Amplifier circuit
deflection factor (with reduced bandwidth ) .
3-1 0
Ch 1 Vertical
Preamp
F rom Q284,
Vertical
Switch ing
S230B
ΙΝΤ T R IG
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
DS400
DS401
Ι
ι
Ι N ORM
CΗ 1
ςΗ 1
(Α Triggeri ng)
Ι
(Β Triggering)
F ig . 3-7 . Trigge r Preamp detailed block diagram .
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
Internal
trigger
signal to
Α Trigger
Ge nerator
Internal
trigger
sign al to
Β Trigger
Generato r
In the CH
1 OR Χ -Υ position of the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch ,
converts the trigger voltage signal at its base to α current
the internal
trigger signal
is obtained from the emitter of
d rive for the remainder of the Trigger Preamp . C R408 in
Q63 in the CH
1 Vertical Preamp circuit . Now, the internal
the emitter circuit of Q404 provides thermal compensation
trigger signal
is α sample
of only th e signal app lied to the
for th e am plifier .
CH
1 OR Χ connector . The CH
1
lights are turned on to
ind icate that the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch is in the CH
1 O R Χ -Υ
position and the CH
1 OU T connector is discon nected from
T he signal current at the collector of Q404 is connected
the circuit .
to the base of Q414 . Q413, Q414, and Q423 are connected
as
α curren t-driven, voltage-output operational amplifier .
R402,
R 403,
and R404 terminate
the coaxial cables
The amp lified signal at the collector of Q414
is connected
from the trigger pickoff stages to provide α constant load
d irectly to
the base of Q413, and to the base of Q423
for these stages .
In th e NORM position of the ΙΝΤ TR IG
through zener diod e VR 421 . Th is zener diode provides α
switc h ,
the N O RM
trigger
signal
from
the
Vertical
DC voltage drop wh ile the signal is connected to the base of
Switc h ing circuit is terminated at the in put to the amp lifier
Q423 with minimum attenuation . 0413 and Q423 are con-
by R404 . The C H
1 O R Χ -Υ trigger signal from the C H 1
nected
as
emitter followers
in
th e com plementary sym-
Vertical
Pream p circu h
is terminated
at the C H
1 OU T
metry
am plifier
configuration .
Th is
configuration
over-
connector by R402 .
I n the CH
1 O R Χ -Υ position, the CH
comes th e basic limitation of emitter followers ; inability to
1 O R Χ -Υ trigger signal
is terminated at the input to
the
provide eq ual response to both positive- and negative-going
amp lifier by R 404, and the NO RM trigger signal is termina-
portions of α signal
. Th is is remedied in th is configuration
ted by R 403 .
by using an ΝΡΝ transistor for one emitter follower, 0413,
and α ΡΝΡ transistor for the other emitter follower, Q423 .
Since
Q413
is
an ΝΡΝ
transistor,
it
responds best
to
Amplifier Circuitry
positive-going
signals
and
Q423,
being
α ΡΝΡ transistor
responds best to negative-going signals . The result
is α cir-
The
internal
trigger
signal selected by
the ΙΝΤ T R IG
cuit which has eq ually
fast response to both positive- and
switch
is connected to the base of Q404 . Transistor Q404
negative-going trigger signals wh ile maintaining α low out-
3- 1 1
put im pedance . Feedback from the output of the Trigger
Preamp circuit
is connected to the base of Q414 th rough
R 419. This feedback provides more linear operation . Total
overall gain of the Trigger Preamp is about 10 . The amp li-
fied
internal trigger
signal
is connected
to the Α and Β
SOUR CE switches through R 427 and R429 .
General
Α TRIGGER G ENERATOR
The Α Trigger Generator circuit produces trigger pulses
to start the Α Sweep Generator circuit . These trigger pulses
are derived either from the internal trigger signal from the
Vertical Deflection System, an external signal connected to
the ΕΧΤ TR IG
I NPUT connector, or α sample of the line
voltage applied to the instrument
. Controls are provided in
th is circuit
to select
trigger
level,
slope, cou pling, and
source . Fig. 3-8 shows α d etailed block diagram of the Α
Trigger Generator circuit . Α schematic of
th is circuit
is
shown on diagram 8 at the rear of th is manual .
S430
SOURCE
Α Trigger
Ι
signal
ΙΝΤ
1
C435 AC
Ι
from Trigge r
Preamp
L INE
C436
LF
ρ ,R EJ
*__--0
Line trigger signal
from Power Supply
ΕΧΤ
__Q
ΕΧΤ - 10
3-1 2
S435
I
Trigge r Τ D
CR475
Input Stage
0443,Q453
R460
ο DC
ιενει ?F~
S455
Fig . 3-8. Α Trigger Generator detailed block diagram .
line, and external . Α fourth position of the Α SOUR CE
switch provid es 10 times attenuation for the external trig-
ger signal .
The internal trigger sign al is obtained from the Vertical
Deflection System th rough the Trigger Preamp circuit
. Th is
signal is α samp le of the signal(s) applied to the CH 1 OR Χ
and/or CH 2 OR Υ connectors . Further selection of the
internal trigger source is provide d by the ΙΝΤ TR IG switch
to provide the internal trigger signal from both channels or
from Channel
1 only (see Trigger Preamp d iscussion for
details) .
The line trigger is obtained from voltage divid er R 1104-
R1105 in the Power Su pply circuit . This sample of the line
frequency, about 1 .5 volts RM S, is cou pled to the Α Trigger
Generator in the L I NE position of the Α SOUR CE switch.
The Α COUPLI NG switch should not be in the LF REJ
position when using this trigger source .
Trigger Source
External
trigger signals applied to the Α ΕΧΤ T R IG
I NPUT connector can be used to produce α trigger in the
The Α SOURCE switch, S430, selects the source of the
ΕΧΤ and ΕΧΤ - 10 positions of the Α SOURCE switch.
Α trigger signal . Three trigger sources are available; internal,
In put resistance (DC) is about one megohm
in both exter-
Slope
Comparator
0454, 0464
-ON
Pulse
-
Shaper
Q484
Pulse
Amp lifier
0473
Auto
Mu ltivibrator
0485, 42494,
Q495
Trigger
pulse
to
Α
Sweep
Gen erator
Auto gate
to
Α
Sweep
Generator
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ι
ηαΙ positions . H owever, in
the LF REJ position of the Α
wh ich the sweep is triggered . The reference voltage for the
COUPL I NG switch , th e med ium and h igh -frequency resis-
comparator is provided by Α LEVEL control R460 a nd Α
tance d rops to about 90 kilohms due to the add ition of
Trigger Level Center adjustment R462 . The Α Trigger Level
C436-R436
in the circuit . In the ΕΧΤ - 10 position, α 10
Center ad justment sets the level at the base of Q464 so the
times frequency compensated attenuator is connected into
d isplay is triggered at the zero-volt DC level of the incoming
the in put circuit . This attenuator reduces the input signal
trigger signal when the Α LEVEL control is centered . The Α
am plitude
10 times to provide more Α LEVEL control
LEVEL control varies the base level of Q464 to select the
range while maintaining the one-megohm Χ20 pF
i nput RC
point on the trigger signal where triggeri ng occurs .
characteristics.
Trigger Coupling
The Α COUPL I NG switch offers α means of accepting or
rejecting certain frequency components of the trigger sig-
nal. In the AC and LF REJ positions, the DC component of
the trigger signal is blocked by cou pling capacitors C435 or
C436 .
In the AC position , frequency components below
about 30 hertz are attenuated .
In the LF REJ position,
frequency components below about 30 k ilohertz are atten-
uated .
The HF REJ position attenuates high-frequency com-
ponents of the triggering signal . The trigger signal
is AC
cou pled to the in put, attenuating signals below about 30
hertz and above about 50 kilohertz . The DC position pro-
vid es eq ual cou pling for all signals from DC to 60 mega-
hertz .
Input Stage
T he trigger signal from the Α COUPL I NG switch is con-
nected to the Input Stage th rough the network C440-R 438-
R439-R440-R 441 . R438-R439 provide the in put resistance
for th is stage . The voltage-d ivider action of R438-R439
allows about 98% of DC or low freq uency signals applied to
R438 to be available at the junction of R438 and R439 .
C440 along with the stray capacitance in the circuit forms
an AC divider wh ich maintains about th is same voltage divi-
sion for h igh -freq uency signals. R440
limits the current
d rive to the gate of FET Q443 . Diode CR441 protects the
circuit by clamping the gate of Q443 at about -12 .5 volts
if α h igh -am plitude negative signal
is applied to the ΕΧΤ
TR IG
INPUT connector. Over-voltage protection for high-
amplitude positive signals
is provided by the forward con-
duction of FET Q443 .
Q443 is connected as α source follower to provide α high
input impedance and α low output imped ance . As α result,
this stage provid es isolation between the Α Trigger Genera-
tor circuit and the trigger signal source . The output signal
'
from Q443
is connected to the Slope Com parator stage
through emitter follower Q453 . Diode CR 449, CR459, and
The slope of the input sign al wh ich triggers the Α sweep
VR460 provide protection for the Slope Comparator stage
is determined by Α SLOPE
switch S455 . When the Α
transistors, Q454 and Q464 .
S LOPE switch
is set to the - position, the collector of
Q454 is connected to the +12-volt su pply through CR456
Slope Comparator
and R 467 . The anode of CR466 is ground ed and it is re-'
verse biased . Now the collector current of Q464 must flow
Q454 and Q464 are connected as α difference amp lifier
through CR 465, R459, the parallel combination CR475
(com parator) to provide selection of the slope and level at
and R 468-R 469-L469, and R467 to the +12-volt supply
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
R458 establishes the emitter current of Q454 and Q464 .
The transistor with the most positive base controls conduc-
tion of the comparator . For example, assume that the trig-
ger signal from the Input Stage is positive going and Q454 is
forward biased . The increased cu rrent flow through R458
produces α
larger voltage drop, and the emitters of both
Q454 and Q464 go more positive . Α more positive voltage
at the emitter of Q464 reverse biases this transistor, since
its base is held at the voltage set by the Α LEVEL control,
and its collector current decreases . At the same time, Q454
is forward b iased and its collector current increases . N otice
that the signal currents at the collectors of Q454 and Q464
are opposite
in phase. The sweep can be triggered from
either the negative-going or positive-going slope of the input
trigger signal by producing the trigger pulse from either the
signal at the collector of Q464 for - slo pe operation or the
signal at the collector of Q454 for + slope operation. Th is
selection is made by SLOPE switch S455 .
When the Α LEVEL control is set to 0 (midrange), the
base of Q464
is at about one volt positive, which corres-
ponds to α zero-volt level at the input to this circuit (with
correct calibration) . The base-emitter drop of Q464 sets the
common emitter level of Q454-Q464 to about +ρ.3 volt .
Since the base of Q454 must be about 0 .65 volt more posi-
tive than the emitter before it can cond uct, the com parator
switches arou nd
the zero-volt level of the trigger signal
(zero-volt level on the trigger signal correspond s to about
one volt positive at th is point) . As the Α LEVEL control is
turned clockwise toward +, the voltage at the base of Q464
becomes more positive . Th is
increases the current flow
through R 458 to produce α more positive voltage on the
emitters of both Q454 and Q464 . Now the trigger signal
must rise more positive before Q454 is biased on . The re-
sulta nt CRT disp lay starts at α more positive point on the
displayed signal . When the Α LEVEL control
is
in the -
region, the effect
is the opposite, to produce α resultant
CRT d isplay which starts at α more negative point on the
trigger signal .
3-13
Circuit Descri ption-453A/R453A
(see Fig . 3-9) . Since the output pulse from the Α Trigger
operates in
its low-voltage state . The current from one of
Generator circuit
is derived from th e negative-going portion
the transistors
in
the Slope Comparator stage is diverted
of the signal applied to the Trigger TD stage, the sweep is
th rough th e Trigger TD stage by th e Α SLOPE switch . As
triggered on the negative-going portion of the input trigger
th is current increases due to α change in the trigger signal,
signal
(signal applied to Trigger TD stage is in phase with
tunnel d iode C R475 switches to its h igh -voltage state . L 469
th e in put signal for - slope triggering) . When the Α SLOPE
opposes th e sudd en change
in current, wh ich allows more
switch
is set to +, cond itions are reversed (see F ig . 3-10) .
current to pass through CR475 and switch it more quick ly .
Q464
is connected to the +12-volt supp ly throug h C R 466
As
the current flow stab ilizes, L469
again conducts the
and
R 467 . The anode of C R456 is grounded to divert
the
major part of th e current . However, the current th rough
collector current of Q454 through
the Trigger TD stage .
CR 475 remains h igh enough to hold
it
in its high-voltage
The signal a pplied to the Trigger TO stage is now 180 ° out
state . The circuit remains in th is cond ition until the current
of phase with the input trigger signal, so the sweep is trig-
from the Slo pe Com parator stage decreases due to α change
gered on the positive-going portion of the in put signal .
in
the trigger signal app lied to the input . Then, the current
through C R 475 decreases and
it reverts to its low-voltage
state .
Trigger TD
T he Trigger TO stage
shapes
the output of th e Slope
Pulse Am pl if ier
Comparator to provide
α trigger pulse with α fast lead ing
The trigger signal from the Trigger TO stage is connected
edge .
Tunnel
d iode CR 475
is q uiescently biased
so
it
to
th e base of Pulse Amplifier Q473 through R 472 . The
3- 1 4
ο
CR456 Q
ά
S455
-
SLQPE
- - -Ι
R467
C467
R473
Ι
Ι
C466
CR455
CR465
δ* CR466
-12 V
R453
+12 V
C473
R468 ~
~CR475
R471
-0 ΤΡ475
R469
ρ L469
R459
Ι
R472
Q473
Av\A/--
I
:
5
~.Υ
Current path
Reverse-biased d iode
+75 V
Fig . 3-9 . Trigger path for negative-slope triggering (simplified Α Trigger Generator diagram) .
trigger pulse at th is point is basically α negative-going pulse
+ρ.5
volt . Α simultaneous negative-going pulse with the
wit h
α fast rise . The width of the pulse d epends upon the
same wid th as the trigger pulse is available at the emitter of
waveshape of
the
input
signal
and
th e setting of
the Α
0473 . Th is pulse
is connected to the Auto Pulse Amp lifier
L EVEL control . Q473 is connected as an amplifier with the
stage .
primary of pulse transformer Τ474 provid ing the major col-
lector
load . The negative-going pulse at the base of Q473
Auto Pulse Amplifier
d rives
it into heavy cond uction and the resulting current
increase of Q473 flows through Τ474, R474, Q473, C473,
The
negative-going
trigger pulse
from
the emitter of
and C467 . Due to the short time constant of the RC net-
Q473 is connected to the base of Q484 through R481 . Th is
work involving C473, the current of Q473 quick ly returns
stage is similar to the Pulse Amplifier stage . Ind uctor L484
to the level determined by 8473 . The resultant signal at the
provid es the collector load for this stage . The positive-going
collector of Q473 is α positive-going fast-rise pulse with the
portion of the trigger pulse
is cou pled to the Auto M ulti-
width determined by th e time constants of th e RC network
vibrator stage th rough C R484 . C R483 clamps the collector
in the circuit . Τ474 inverts the output pulse to produce α
of Q484 at about -0.5 volt to eliminate negative transients .
negative-going trigger pulse wh ich is coincident with the rise
of
the
output
signal from
the
Trigger TD
stage . Th is
Auto M ultivibrator
negative-going trigger pulse
is connected to the Α Sweep
Generator
circuit
through C476-R 476 . C R 474 limits the
T he basic configuration of the Auto M ultivibrator stage
collector of Q473 from going more positive
than about
is α monostable multivibrator made up of Q485 and Q495 .
CR455
CR465
-12 V
R453
CR456 _V*
Ι
\,/
C R466
+12 V
R471
R459
R469 ~
~ ι469
R472
Cu rrent path
Reverse-biased d iode
Circuit Description-453A/ R453A
+7ς V
R473
0473
F ig . 3-10 . Trigger path for p ositive-slope triggerin g (simp lified Α Trigger Gen erator diagram) .
3- 1 5
This stage produces th e control gate for the auto trigger
Trigger Generator circuit . Operation
in the AUTO TR IG
circuits located
in the Α Sweep Generator circuit . Under
position
is much the same as NORM T R IG except that α
quiescent cond itions (no trigger signal), the base of Q495 is
free-runn ing trace is displayed when α trigger pulse is not
near zero volts. The base of Q485 is held at about -0.65
present . In the SI NGLE SWEEP position, operation is also
volt by the forward voltage drop of CR484 . Since the base
similar to NORM TR IG except that the sweep
is not re-
of Q495
is the most positive,
it cond ucts and raises the,
current . The following circuit description is given with the
emitter level of Q485 positive enough to hold it off. C485
Α SWEEP MODE switch set to NORM TR IG . Difference in
charges to about +13 volts where it is clamped by CR486
operation for the other two modes are then discussed later.
and CR493. The base of Q494 is clamped at about +12.6
volts by CR493, which reverse biases
it . Since there is no
current flow th rough Q494, its collector level goes negative .
Normal Trigger Mode Operation
When α trigger signal is present, the positive-going pulses
from the Auto Pulse Am plifier stage turn Q485 on th rough
C R484. The collector of Q485 goes negative and C485 d is-
charges rapid ly th rough Q485, R490, and R485 . As C485
d ischarges, the current flow through R490 b iases Q495 off.
When C485 is fully discharged , the current flow th rough
R490 ceases and Q495 comes back on to reset the multi-
vibrator . Now C485 begins to charge towards +75 volts
through R486. Current also flows through R494, and the
base of Q494 goes negative to bias it on . The collector level
of Q494 rises positive to produce the auto gate output for
the Α Sweep Generator circuit .
Sweep Gate . The negative-going trigger pulse generated
by the Α Trigger Generator circuit is applied to th e Sweep
Gate stage through C R501 . Tunnel diode CR505 is quies-
cently biased on in its low-voltage state. When the negative-
going trigger pulse
is applied to
its cathode, the current
through CR505 increases and it rap
idly switches to its high-
voltage state, where
it remains until reset by the Sweep
Reset M ultivibrator stage at the end of the sweep . The
negative-going level at the cathode of CR505 is connected
to the base of Q504 through C503 and R503 . Q504
is
turned on and its collector goes positive . This positive-going
step
is
connected
to
the
Disconnect
Diod e
through
C509-R509 and to the Output Sig nal Amplifier through
C506-R506 .
For low-frequency signals (below about 30 hertz), C485
rech arges
to about +13 volts in about 85 milliseconds .
Output Signal Amplifier . The positive-going gate pulse
Then, Q494 is biased off to end the auto gate (display free
from the Sweep Gate stage applied to the base of Q514
ru n s or is unstable) . However, if α repetitive trigger signal turns
produces α negative-going pulse at its collector . This pulse is
Q485 on again before C485 has charged to +13 volts, C485
connected to th e Ζ Axis Am plifier circuit through R519 to
is d ischarged
completely again and once more starts to
unblan k the CRT du ring sweep time . It is also connected to
charge towards +75 volts. Si nce the base of Q494 remains
the H oldoff Capacitor through R 517 and CR517 to dis-
negative enough with α repetitive trigger signal to hold it in
charge it com pletely at the beginning of each sweep .
conduction, the auto output level is continuous for α stable
display (with correct Α LEVEL control setting) .
The positive-going gate pulse at the base of Q514 is also
coupled from the emitter of Q514 to the emitter of Q524 .
Α SWEEP G ENER ATOR
The resulting positive-going signal at th e collector of Q524
is coupled to the Vertical Switching circuit through C526
General
to
provide an
alternate-trace sync pulse
for dual-trace
operation .
It is also coupled to the Α GATE output con-
The Α Sweep Generator circuit prod uces α sawtooth
nectoron the side panel through R529 . C R 528 and C R529
voltage which is amp lified by the Horizontal Amplifier cir-
clamp the gate signal so it does not go more than about 0 .5
cuit to provide horizontal sweep deflection on the CRT.
volt negative and 12 .5 volts positive .
This output signal is generated on comman d (trigger pulse)
from the Α Trigger Generator circuit . The Α Sweep Gen-
erator circuit also produces an unblanking gate to unblank
the CRT during the Α sweep time . I n addition, this circuit
produces several control signals for other circuits within
Disconnect Diode . Disconnect Diode C R 533
is quies-
this
instrument and several output signals to the side-panel
cently conducting
current th rough
R 506, R508, R509,
connectors . Fig . 3-11 shows α detailed block diagram of the
R530, and R531 . This prevents timing current from Timing
Α Sweep Generator circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit is
Resistor R530 from charging Timing Capacitor C530 . The
shown on diagram 9 at the rear of th is manual .
positive-going gate signal from Q504 reverse b iases CR533
and interru pts the qu iescent current flow . Now the timing
current
through
the Timing
Resistor
begins to charge
Timing Capacitor C530 so the Sawtooth Sweep Generator
The Α SWEEP MODE switch allows three modes of
stage can produce α sawtooth output signal . The positive-
operation. In the NORM TR IG position, α sweep
is pro-
going gate signal also reverse biases CR547 to disconnect
duced only when α trigger pulse
is received from the Α
the Sweep Start Amp lifier . Th e Disconnect Diode is α fast
Trigger Pu lse
from Α Trigge r
Generator
Fig. 3-11 . Α Swee p Ge nerator detailed block diagram .
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
Sawtoot h Sweep
Generato r
0533, 0531
S530A
Α sweep to
Delay-P ic koff
Comparator
Β Sweep
Generator
--}"~
Α sweep to
Horizontal
Amplifier
Α unblan k ing gate
Alternate trace
sy nc pu lse
Α GATE
turn-off d iode with low reverse leakage to red uce switching
Q533 through R533 . Th is produces α positive-goi ng output
time and improve timing linearity at the start of the sweep.
voltage which is connected to the base of Q531
through
R536 . Q531 am plifies and inverts the voltage change at its
base to produce α negative-going Sawtoot h output . To pro-
Sawtoot h Sweep Generator . The basic generator circuit
vide α
linear charging rate for the Timing Capacitor, the
is α M iller Integrator circuit . Wh en the current flow through
sweep output
signal
is connected to
the negative
side of
C R533 is interru pted by the Sweep Gate signal, the Timing
C530 . Th is feedback provides α constant charging current
Capacitor C530 begi ns to charge through Timing Resistor
for C530 wh ich maintains α constant charge rate to prod uce
R 530, and the Α Sweep Cal Adjustment R 531 . The Timing
α
linear Sawtoot h output signal . The output voltage con-
Capacitor and
R esistor are selected by
the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V
tinues to go negative un til the circuit
is reset through the
switch to change sweep rate . The Α Sweep Cal adj ustment
Sweep
R eset Multivibrator stage . The output signal from
allows calibration for accurate sweep timing . The Α VA R
the
collector
of Q531
is connected
to
the H orizontal
control, R530Y (see Timing Switch diagram), provides vari-
Amplifier circuit
through R538, the Delay Pickoff Com-
able swee p rates by varying the charge rate of the Timing
parator stage
i n the Β Sweep Generator
circuit
th roug h
Capacitor . UNCA L
light DS530W
(see Diagram
12)
ind i-
R 532,
and the Β Sweep Start stage
th roug h
the H OR I-
cates when the sweep is not calibrated .
ZO NTA L DISPLAY switch .
The positive-going voltage at the R530 side of C530 as it
Sweep Reset E mitter Follower . The negative-goi ng saw-
charges toward +75
volts is connected to the gate of FET
tooth voltage at the collector of Q531
is connected to the
3- 1 7
base of the Sweep Reset E mitter Follower stage Q543 . The
stage is turned on to rapidly d ischarge the Timing Capacitor
negative-going signal
at the emitter of Q543
is coupled to
and
pull the gate of Q533 rapidly negative to its o riginal
the Sweep Reset Multivibrator
stage to determine sweep
level to produce the retrace portion of the Sawtooth signal .
length and to the Sweep Start Amplifier stage to set the
The Sawtooth Sweep Generator stage is now ready to pro-
starting point for the sweep. C R542 connected to the base
duce another sweep as soon as the Sweep R eset Mu lti-
of Q543 protects th is stage du ring instrument warmup.
vibrator stage is reset and another trigger pulse is received .
Sweep Start Amplifier . The signal at the emitter of Q543
When Q575
is turned on to end the sweep, it remains in
goes negative along with the applied Sawtooth signal . Th is
cond uction
for α
period of time to
estab lish α holdoff
increases
the forward bias on CR 543, which in turn de-
period and allow all circuits to return to their original con-
creases the forward bias on CR 545 as the Sawtooth goes
ditions before
the next sweep
is produced . The holdoff
negative . When the a node of C R543 reaches α level about
time
is determi ned by the charge rate of Holdoff Capacitor
o ne volt more negative than the level on the base of Q544,
ς550 . At the start of the sweep , C550
is completely dis-
it
is reverse biased to
interru pt the current flow through
charged by the unbla nk ing gate at the collector of Q514 . It
Q544 .
is held
at th is level
throughout the sweep time . When the
Sweep Gate output end s, Q514 is cut off and C550 begins
The
circu it
remains
in
th is condition until after
the
to charge toward +75 volts through R 552 and R551 . The
sweep retrace
is complete . As the voltage at the emitter of
positive-going voltage across the H oldoff Capacitor
as
it
Q543 returns to
its original DC
level at the end of the
charges
is connected to the base of Q575 through CR552
sweep , C R545
is again forward biased and Q544 cond ucts
and VR 559 . When the base of Q575 rises positive enough
through CR547 to set the quiescent current through the
so it is reverse biased , its collector level drops negative and
Disconnect
Diode CR533 . T h is
establishes
the
correct
Q585 comes back
into conduction . The bias on the Sweep
starting point for the sweep . CR 546 clam ps the collector of
Gate tun nel diode CR505 retu rns to α level that allows it to
Q544 at about +0 .5 volt . This reduces the voltage swing at
accept the next trigger pulse (C R505 is enabled) . Holdoff
the collector of Q544 and
improves the response time .
Capacitor C550
is changed by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV switch fo r
Sweep Start ad j ustment R758
(in the Β Sweep Generator
the various sweep rates to provide the correct holdoff time .
circuit) sets the base voltage level of Q544 . The collector of
Diagram 12 shows α complete diagram of the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DIV
Q531 is held at this same voltage level through the feedback
etch .
loop comprised of Q533 and Q531,
thereby
setting the
starting
point of
the
Sawtooth output
signal . The
level
established by the Sweep Start ad justment is also connected
As
the Α SWEEP LENGTH control is rotated counter-
to the Β Sweep Start Am plifier so the Β sweep starts at the
clockwise from
the FULL position , R555 places α more
same voltage level as the Α sweep (except i n MIXED) .
positive level on the anode of C R556 than is on the anode
of C R 555 so C R555
remains reverse
biased . The Sweep
Reset M ultivibrator
is reset as described for FULL sweep
Sweep Reset Multivibrator . The negative-goi ng Sawtooth
length operation at
the point where C R556 (instead of
signal at the emitter of Q543 is coupled to the cathodes of
CR555)
is forward b iased. Since th is occurs at α more posi-
CR555
and CR 556 . These diodes are quiescently reverse
tive
level
on the negative-going Sawtooth, the displayed
biased at the start of
the sweep . As the Sawtooth voltage at
sweep
is
shorter. Thus, R555 provides α variable sweep
its cathode goes negative, C R555 is forward biased at α level
length
for
the Α sweep (from about
11 d ivisions in the
about 0.5 volt more negative than the base level of Q575
(Α
FULL position to
about four d ivision s in the fully clock-
SWEEP LENGTH control
in FULL position) . Then
the
wise position-not in Β EN DS Α detent) . In the Β ENDS Α
negative-going
Sawtooth
signal
from
the
Sweep
Reset
position
(fully
counterclockwise),
α negative-going pulse
Emitter Follower stage
is connected to the base of Q575 .
from
the Β Sweep Generator
circuit
is connected to the
Q575 and Q585 are connected as α Schmitt bistable multi-
base of Q575 through CR 575 at the end of the Β sweep
vibrator .
Quiescently, at the start of the sweep, Q585
is
time .
If
the Α sweep
is
still runni ng,
this negative-going
conducting and Q575
is biased off to produce α negative
pulse turns Q575 on to end the Α sweep also . Since the Α
level at its collector . This negative level allows Sweep Gate
sweep ends immed iately following the end of the Β sweep,
tunnel d iode C R 505 to be switched to produce α sweep as
t h is
position
provides
the
maximu m
repetition
rate
discussed previously . When the negative-going sweep signal
(brightest trace) for Delayed Sweep mode operation .
is connected to the base of Q575 through C R 555, Q575 is
eventually biased on and Q585 is biased off by the emitter
cou pling between Q575 and Q585 . The collector of Q575
rises positive and CR505 is switched back to its low-voltage
The HF STA B control, R551, varies the charging rate of
state through R502 . CR 505
is held in its low-voltage state
the Holdoff Capacitor to provide α stable disp lay at fast
so it cannot accept
incoming trigger pulses until after the
sweep rates . Th is change
in holdoff allows sweep synchro-
Sweep
Reset M ultivibrator stage
is reset . This end s the
nization for less d isplay jitter at the faster sweep rates . The
Sweep
Gate
stage output and the Disconnect Amplifier
HF STAB control has little effect at slow sweep rates .
3- 1 8
Lamp Driver . The auto gate level from the Auto Multi-
through C R555 or C R556 at the end of the sweep . With
vibrator
stage
in
the Α Trigger Generator circuit
is con-
Q575 on, C R505
is held in its low-voltage state to lock out
nected
to Lam p Driver stage Q594, throug h CR 591 and
any incoming trigger pulses . The circuit remains in th is εοη -
C R 594 . Th is gate level is coincident wit h the trigger pulse
dition
until
reset
by
the
Single-Sweep Reset Amp lifier
generated by
the Α Trigger Generator circuit and
is present
stage .
only when
th e
instrument
is
correctly
triggered . T he
positive-going auto-gate
level saturates Q594 and
its col-
lector goes negative to about zero volts . Th is applies about
Single-Sweep
Reset
Amplifier .
Single-Sweep
Reset
12 volts across DS596, Α SWEEP TR IG'D
ligh t, and
it
Amp lifier Q564 prod uces α pulse to reset the Sweep Reset
comes on . Th is light remains on as long as the auto-gate
Multivibrator
stage so anot her sweep can be prod uced in
level
is present . When the auto-gate level goes negative be-
the SI NG LE SWEEP mode of operation . Quiescently, Q564
cause the instrument is no longer triggered , CR 595 clam ps
is biased off and th e RES ET switch
is open . When the
the base
level of Q594
at about -0 .5
volt and Q594
is
RES ET button
is pressed, DS568 ignites and th e voltage at
reverse
biased . The collector of Q594
rises positive and
the base of Q564 goes negative . Q564 saturates and pro
DS596 goes off .
duces
α positive-going output pulse . Th is pulse has suffi-
cient amplitude to shut off Q575 and allow Q585 to con-
duct and enable Sweep Gate tunnel d iode C R505 . Now the
Auto Trigger Mode Operation
Α Sweep Generator circuit can be triggered when the next
O peration
of
the Α Sweep Generator
circuit
in
the
trigger pulse is received .
AUTO TR IG position of the Α SWEEP M OD E switch is the
same as for the NO RM T R IG position
j ust described when α
Lamp Driver . In the SI NG LE SWEEP mode, the cathode
trigger pulse is app lied. H owever, when α trigger pulse is not
of CR 591
is connected to ground to b lock the incoming
present, α free-running reference trace is produced
in
the
auto-gate
level . Α SWEEP T R IG'D
ligh t DS596
is discon
AUTO TR IG mode . Th is occurs as follows :
nected from the collector of Q594 and RES ET light DS597
is connected into th e circuit . The anode of C R 595 is also
d isconnected from ground . Now
the cond ition of Q594 is
The auto-gate level from the Auto M ultivibrator stage in
determined by th e Sweep Reset Mbltivibrator stage . When
the Α Trigger Generator circuit is also connected to CR592 .
Q585
is off before
the RESE T button
is pressed , the col-
When the auto-gate level is positive (instrument triggered),
lector
level
of
Q585
is
negative . The
current
th rough
the current flowing through CR592 and R593 reverse biases
R594-CR595-R587- R 588 sets the base level of Q594 nega-
CR593 and Sweep Gate tunnel d iode C R505 operates as
tive
enough
to
bias
it off . H owever, when
the RESET
previously d escribed for NORM TR IG operation
. H owever,
button
is pressed
and Q585 turns on,
its collector goes
when
the instrument
is not triggered , the auto-gate
level
positive . Th is positive level allows the base of Q594 to go
d ro ps negative and the reduction in current through C R592
positive also and
it is biased on . The collector of Q594 goes
and R593 allows C R593 to become forward biased . Now,
negative and
the RESE T
lig ht comes on . Q594 and the
when
the Sweep Reset M ultivibrator stage resets at the end
RESET light remain on until Q585 turns off again at the
of
th e
hold off
period,
the
add itional
current
from
end of the next sweep.
R593-C R 593 flows
th rough CR505 and
is sufficient to
automatically
switch th e Sweep Gate tunnel diod e back
into
its h igh -voltage state . Th e result
is that the Α Sweep
Β TR IGG ER G ENERATO R
Generator circuit is automatically retriggered at the end of
each
h oldoff period and α free-running sweep is produced .
Since the sweep free runs at the sweep rate of the Α Sweep
General
Generator circuit (as selected by the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch ),
The Β Trigger Generator circuit
is basically the same as
α brig ht reference trace is prod uced even at fast sweep rates .
the Α Trigger Generator circuit . Only
the d ifferences be-
tween the two circuits are discussed here . Portions of the
circuit not described in the following discussion operate in
Single Sweep Operation
the same manner
as for
the Α Trigger Generator circuit
General .
O peration
of
the Sweep
Generator
in
the
(correspond ing circuit nu mbers are assigned in the 600-699
range) . F ig . 3-12 shows α detailed block diagram of the Β
SI NG LE SWEEP position of the Α SWEEP MODE switch is
Trigger
Generator
circuit . Α
schematic of
th is circuit
is
similar to operation in the other modes . However, after one
shown on d iagram 10 at the rear of th is ma n ual .
sweep has been produced , the Sweep Reset Multivibrator
stage does not reset . All succeed ing trigger pulses are locked
out until the RESET button is pressed .
Input Stage
The Β Input Stage operates in basically the same manner
In the SI N G LE SWEEP position, the Α SWEEP M OD E
as
described for the Α Trigger Generator circuit . H owever,
switch d isconnects
the charging current
for
the Holdoff
in the Β Trigger Generator circuit, HO R IZ DIS PL AY switch
Capacitor . Now, Q575 remains on when it is forward biased
S801A and C R 638 block
the Β Trigger Generator
input
3- 1 9
Circuit Description-453Α/R 453A
3-20
ΕΧΤ
TR IG
OR Χ
L ine
trigger
sign al
from
ΕΧΤ
Power Supply
L INE
-
Ο
S635
113 SWEEP M
Ι
S801Α
Ι
HOR IZ DISPLAY
Ι
ι
Ι
COUPL ING
5610
Ι
ΙΙ
SOUR CE
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Ι
Β trigger
Ι
Ι
sign al
Ί
Ι
~
from Trigger
ΙΝΤ
Ι
C615
AC
Ι
Inp ut
Slope
Preamp 0-0ν
Ο633
ι
Stage
Comparator
Οβςq, Οβ64
ο643
+10 Attenuator
Trigger
Trigger
Pulse
pulse
TO
Amp lifier
to Β
S615
Ι
Ι
Ι
CR675
Ο684
Sweep
Generator
R660
E xter n al
I NPUT
ΙL-~
Ho rizo n tal
Gain
Network
F ig . 3-12 . Β Trigger Ge nerator detailed block diagram .
External
horizontal
signal to
Horizontal
Amplifier
signal in the modes where Β triggering is not desired . In the
connected
to
its cathode
th roug h R 642 by S801A . The
Α position of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch , -12 volts is
signal from the Input Stage is connected to the Horizontal
connected
to
the
cathode
of C R 635 and
it
is forward
Amplifier
th rough C R 641
and External Horizontal
Gain
biased . Since the cathode of C R638
is connected to +12
Network R 644-R645-R646 .
Gain
of
the External H ori-
volts
throug h R 638, C R 638
is reverse b iased and
it blocks
zontal
circuit
is set by R 645, E xt H oriz Gain, so α signal
the
trigger
signal
.
In
the
Α
ΙΝΤΕΝ
D UR I NG
Β ,
Β
app lied
to the CH
1 O R Χ connector produces the
indi
(DELAYE D
SWEEP),
and M IX E D
positions,
α
second
cated horizontal deflection .
switch , Β SWEEP MOD E S635 determines whether the Β
trigger signal
is blocked or passed to the Slope Comparator
stage .
If the Β SWEEP M OD E switch is in
the Β STA RTS
A FT ER
DELAY
TIME
position,
th e
trigger
signal
is
bloc ked as
in the Α position . However, the Β Sweep Gen-
The external horizontal
signal
can be obtained either
erator essentially free ru ns
in th is position as controlled by
externally from the Β ΕΧΤ TR IG O R Χ
I N PU T connector
another portion of the Β SWEEP M OD E switch located in
when the Β SOUR CE switch is set to ΕΧΤ or ΕΧΤ = 10, or
the Β Sweep Gen erator circuit (see Β Sweep Generator d is-
internally from Channel
1 when the ΙΝΤ T R IG switch is in
cussion ) .
In
the TR IGG ERABLE A FT ER DELAY TIME
the CH
1 OR Χ -Υ position and the Β SOUR CE switch is set
position, -12 volts is connected to
the cathode of CR 638
to ΙΝΤ .
through R639 rather than
to C R635 . Th is forward biases
C R638 and allows the Β trigger signal to pass to the Β Slope
Comparator stage .
Pulse Amplifier
S655
S LOPE
In all positions of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch except
The Pulse Am plifier
i n the Β Trigger Generator operates
Χ-Y, C R 641
is bac k
biased since it
is connected to +12
much the same
as
in the Α Trigger Generator . H owever,
volts through R 641 . In the Χ -Υ position, C R638
is reverse
since there
is no Auto circuit in the Β Trigger Generator, α
biased because
its cathode rises positive toward +12 volts
pulse is available only at the collector of Q684 . The output
applied through R 638 . Therefore, the trigger sig nal can not
pulse
is a pplied to the Β Sweep Generator through Τ686
pass th roug h C R 638 . C R 641
is forward b iased by -12 volts
and R 688-C688 .
Basically, the Β Output Signal Amplifier
is the same as
The Β Swee p Generator circuit
is basically the same as
the corresponding circuit in the Α Sweep Generator circuit .
the Α Swee p Generator
circu it . Only the differences be-
Two
unblan king gates are available from
the collector of
tween
the two
circuits are d iscussed here . The following
0714 . An
unblank ing
gate
is connected to
the Ζ Axis
circuits operate
as described
for
the Α Sweep Generator
Am plifier circuit through R 717 and
the HOR IZ DISPLAY
(corres ponding
circuit
numbers assigned
in
the 700-799
switch to unblank the C R T to display the Β sweep . F or Α
range) :
Sweep Gate
(C R 705,
Q704),
Disconnect
Diode
ΙΝΤΕΝ
DUR I N G
Β
operation,
add ition al
unblanking
(C R 742), Sawtoot h Sweep Generator
(0743 and Q741),
current
is added to
the Α unblan k ing gate during
the Β
and the Sweep Reset Emitter Follower (Q753) . F ig . 3-13
sweep time . Th is produces α display which is partially υη -
shows α detailed block diagram of the Β Sweep Generator
b lanked during Α sweep time and further unblanked during
circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit
is shown on diagram 11
Β sweep time to prod uce α display w h ich has an
intensified
at the rear of th is manual .
portion coinciden t wit h the Β sweep time .
Β SWEEP G ENER ATO R
Output Signal Amplifier
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
Mixed Sweep
Unb lank ing
Multivi brator
0779,Q790
Trigger pulse
from
Β Trigger
Generator
S635
F ig . 3-13 . Β Sweep Generator detailed bloc k diagram .
Mixed Sweep
Unb lank ing
to Ζ-Axis
Amplifier
Β un blanking gate to
Ζ Axis Amplifier
Α
intensified un blanking
gate to Ζ Axis Amplifier
3-2 1
Circuit Description-453Α/R 453A
Β E nds Α Pulse Amplifier
pulse forces the Β Sweep Reset Multivibrator to reset and
The positive-going voltage as the Β unblanking gate end s
end th e Β sweep also .
is cou pled to Β Ends Α Pulse Amplifier Q734 through C731
and C R731 . When the Α SWEEP LEN GTH control
is in the
Delay Multivibrator
Β EN DS Α position, th is pulse saturates Q734 to produce α
negative-going output pulse at its collector . Th is negative-
The Delay M ultivibrator, Q768 and Q772, provides α
going pulse
is connected to the Α Sweep Reset Multivibra-
lockout for
the Β Sweep Generator circuit during
the Α
for stage to reset the Α sweep at the end of the Β sweep for
Sweep Generator
reset and holdoff time to allow accurate
maximum delayed sweep repetition rate .
delayed-sweep
measurements
w hen
the
DELAY-TIME
MULTI PL
I ER dial
is set near 0 . Th is stage prevents the Β
Sweep Generator from being triggered before the Α Sweep
Delay-Pickoff Comparator
Generator
is triggered
( Β Sweep Generator must always be
The Delay-Pick off Comparator stage allows selection of
triggered
after
the Α Sweep Generator
is triggered) . Th is
th e amount of d elay from
the start of the Α sweep before
circuit
also produces
α pulse wh ich resets
the Β Sweep
the Β Sweep Generator
is turned on . Th is stage allows the
Reset M ultivibrator
stage after
the delay period
so the Β
start of Β sweep to be delayed between 0.20 and
10 .20
Sweep Gate
tunnel d iode can be enabled
to produce α
times the setting of the Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch . Then, the Β
sweep.
Sweep Generator is turned on and o perates at α sweep rate
independent
of the Α Sweep Generator (determined by
Transistors 0768 and Q772 are connected as α Schmitt
setting of Β ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch ) .
bistable multivibrator . Quiescently, Q772
is held on by the
negative level at th e collector of Q764A and Q768 remains
Q764A and Β are connected as α voltage comparator . In
off . The circuit remains in th is cond ition until the incoming
th is
configuration, the transistor with the
most positive
ρ` sweep switches the Delay-Pickoff Comparator (see Delay-
base controls conduction . Α dual transistor, Q764, and α
Pickoff Comparator discussion) . Then,
the base of Q772
dual d iode, C R764, provide tem perature stability for the
goes positive and it turns off . At the same time, the base of
com parator
circuit .
Q769
maintains α
constant
current
Q768
is pulled negative by the collector level of Q764B and
th rough the conducting transistor .
Reference voltage for
it turns on . Th e collector of Q772 goes negative and α
negative-going
output pulse
is
cou pled
to
the Β Sweep
the
comparator
circuit
is
provid ed
by
DELAY-TIME
Reset M ultivibrator
stage through C774 . Th is pulse resets
MULTI PL I ER control R760 . The voltage to th is control is
the Β Sweep Reset M ultivibrator wh ich in turn enables the
filtered by R759-C759 to hold
it constant and allow precise
Β Sweep Gate stage .
delay pickoff . The
instrument
is calibrated so
that the
ma j or dial mark ings of R760 correspond to the ma j or divi-
sions
of
horizontal
deflection
on
the
graticule
.
For
M ixed Sweep
if the DELAY-TIME MULTI PL I ER d ial
is set to
weep Unblan k ίng MuIt~V ίbrator
5.00, the Β Sweep Generator is delayed five d ivisions of the
Transistors Q779 and Q790 com prise α bistable multi-
Α sweep time before it can prod uce α sweep
( Β sweep delay
vibrator very similar in configuration to the Sweep Reset
time equals five times setting of Α ΤΙΜΕ/DI V switch ) .
Multivibrator . The purpose of the Mixed Sweep Unblank ing
Multivibrator is to provide add itional unblanking d uring the
Β sweep portion of α mixed sweep display . Because the Β
The output sawtoot h from
the Α Sawtoot h Sweep Gen-
Sweep Generator
is normally running at α faster sweep rate
erator stage is connected to the base of Q764A . The quies-
than the Α Sweep Generator in α mixed sweep d isplay, th is
cent
level of the Α sawtoot h biases Q764A on and
its col-
add itional unblanking reduces
the intensity differences be
lector
is negative enough to hold Q772 in the Delay Multi-
tween the two parts of the d isplay .
vibrator stage in cond uction . As the Α sweep output saw-
tooth begins to run down, the base of Q764A also goes
negative . When it goes more negative than the level at the
base of Q764B
(established by the DELAY-TIME MULTI-
During th e Α Sweep portion of α mixed sweep display,
PL I ER control), Q764B takes over conduction of the com-
transistor Q779
is off and Q790
is on . At the end of the
parator and Q764A shuts off . Th is also switches the Delay
d elay time α negative pulse is coupled to the base of Q779
M ultivibrator stage to produce α negative-going reset pulse
from
the collector of Q772 by capacitor C774 . Q779 is
to the Β Sweep Reset Multivibrator .
turned on
and
its
collector
goes positive . Th is positive
movement
is
coupled
to
the
base
of Q790
through
C780-11780, and Q790 turns off . At
the same time th at
Q779
is turned on, the pulse from C774 turns Q775 on and
When the Α sweep resets, Q764A is again returned to
its collector goes positive . The negative movement of the
conduction and Q764B
is turned off . Th is also resets the
collector of Q790 and the positive movement of the col-
Delay M ultivibrator to prod uce α positive-going
output
lector of Q775 are added together so that the net change at
pulse .
If
the Β
sweep
is
still running, th is positive-going
the base of Q797
is an app roximate 0.6 volt more positive
3-22
level . The increased conduction of Q797 causes its collector
When the Β Sweep Reset Multivibrator
is reset by the
to ste p slightly more negative to further unblan k the C RT
Delay Multivibrator, Q775 comes on and Q785 turns off .
display . Then at the end of th e Β Sweep time, Q790 turn s
The collector of Q785 goes negative and Β Sweep Gate
on and Q775 turns off . The negative movement at the base
tunnel diode CR 705
is enabled. The state in which C R705
of Q797
is sufficient to cause total blanking of the CRT so
remains depends upon the Β SWEEP MODE switch and the
any remaining part of Α Sweep is not seen .
HOR IZ DIS PLAY switch . When Β SWEEP M ODE switch
S635
is set to
the T R IGGER ABLE AF TER D ELAY TIME
position, C R705 is biased so
it can be switched to its high -
Mixed Sweep Unblanking Ampl if ier
voltage state by
the next trigger pulse from
the Β Trigger
In the MIX E D position of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch ,
Generator . However,
in the Β STARTS AF TER DELAY
TIME position,
the setting of HOR IZ
DISPLAY
switch
+12 volts is applied to the collector of the M ixed Sweep
Sg01A determines operation of the Β Sweep Gate tunnel
Blank ing Amplifier Q797
through collector load
resistor
diod e . In
the Α position, the Β trigger pulses are block ed in
R797 . Th is activates Q797 so it can am plify the mixed-
the Β Trigger Generator circuit so the Β Sweep Generator
sweep unblanking gate at its base . The output at the εοΙ -
cannot be triggered and does not prod uce α sweep. In the
lector of Q797
is added to the Α unblanking gate (see Hori-
remaining positions of S801A, -12 volts is connected to
blanking
zontal Display Switch , Diagram 14) to produ ce α composite
the cathode
of C R705
through
R786
and
R789
. Th is
ng gate for the Ζ -Axis Amplifier .
voltage pulls the cathode of CR 705 negative enough so
it
automatically
switches
to
its h igh -voltage state after it
is
enabled by
the Β Sweep Reset M ultivibrator stage
. Th is
Sweep Start Am plifier
produces α free-ru nning
Β sweep reset similar to the no
In
all positions of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch except
trigger AU TO T R IG mod e in the Α Sweep Generator, How-
MIXED, the operation of Β Sweep Start Amplifier Q754 is
ever,
since
the
Β Sweep
is
reset
(and automatically
re-
the same
as described
for
the Α Sweep Start Amplifier
triggered)
at α fixed point on the Α sweep sawtooth , the
stage .
In
the M IX E D position,
the Sweep Start control
d isp lay
is relatively stable . The best delayed sweep stability
R758
is disconnected from
the base of Q754 and the Α
is provided in the T R IGGER ABLE AF TER D ELAY TIME
sweep sawtooth is app lied . Now, the point at which the Β
position, since the Β sweep is triggered by the trigger signal
Sweep Generator will
start generating
its sawtoot h wave-
in th is mode .
form is constantly being changed by the Α sweep sawtoot h .
The outp ut waveform from
the Β Sweep Generator takes
the form of α composite sawtoot h waveform with the first
and
last parts occurring
at
α rate determined by
the Α
HO R IZO NTAL AMPL I F I ER
Sweep Generator
(last part of com posite sweep blanked
out), and the middle part at α rate determined by the Β
General
Sweep Generator .
T he Horizontal Amplifier circuit provides the output sig-
nal to the C R T horizontal deflection plates . In all positions
of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch except Χ-Y, the horizontal
deflection
signal
is α sawtooth from
either th e Α Sweep
Generator circuit or the Β Sweep Generator circuit . In the
Sweep R eset Multivibrator
Χ -Υ position , the horizontal deflection signal
is obtained
from
the
Input
Stage
of
the
Β
Trigger
Generator .
In
The basic Β Sweep Reset Multivibrator configuration
addition, th is circuit contains the horizontal magnifier cir-
and operation
is the same
as for the Α Sweep Generator .
it and
the horizontal positioning
network . F ig .
3-14
However, several differe nces do exist . The Β Sweep Reset
cu it
α detailed block d iagram of the H orizontal Amp lifier
Multivibrator does not have
α sweep length network for
circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit
is shown on d iagram 13
variable sweep length or α Holdoff Capacitor and associated
at
the rear of th is manual .
circuit to reset the Β Sweep Reset Multivibrator after the
retrace . Instead, the negative-going sweep from the Β Sweep
Reset E mitter Follower, 0753, is connected to the base of
Input Amp lifiers
Q785
through CR748 .
Diode CR 748
is forward biased
when the sweep voltage at the emitter of Q753 dro ps about
The input signal for the Horizontal Am plifier is selected
0.5 volt more negative than
the level at the base of Q785
by HO R IZ
DISPLAY
switch S801A .
In
the Α and Α
estab lished by
voltage d ivid er
R784-R785 between +12
ΙΝΤΕΝ
DUR I N G Β positions of
the HO R IZ DISPLAY
volts and
the collector of Q775 . T h is negative-going saw-
switch , the sawtooth from the Α Sweep Generator
is con-
tooth turns on Q785, and
its collector goes positive to
nected to the base of the - Input Amplifier, Q814, through
switch Β Sweep Gate tunnel d iode C R705 to its low-voltage
R803 .
In the Β (D ELAY E D SWEEP) position, the Β saw-
state, wh ich resets th e Β Sweep . Q785 remains on and holds
tooth is connected to the base of 0814 and in the MIXED
the Β Sweep Gate tunnel diode
locked out
until
the Β
position, the com posite sawtoot h from the Β Sweep Gen-
Sweep Reset Multivibrator
is reset by
th e Delay Multi-
erator
is connected to the base of Q814 . Whichever saw-
vi brator .
tooth signal
is connected to the base of Q814 prod uces α
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
3-23
Β sawtooth and
mixed sawtooth
from Β Sweep
Ge nerator
3-24
Exter n al
horizontal
sig n al from
Β Trigger Generator
MAG
Fig. 3-14 . Horizontal Amp lifier detailed bloc k diagram .
S330
BEAM F INDER
Horizontal
deflection
signal to
horizon tal
deflectio n
plates
current change wh ich
is amplified to prod uce α positive-
Q814 . These controls vary the q uiescent DC
level
at the
going sawtooth voltage at the collector . Th is positive-going
base of Q814 wh ich in turn sets the DC level at the horizon-
sawtooth
signal
is connected to the base of Q834 in the
tal deflection plates to determine th e horizontal position of
Para ph ase Amplifier stage .
the trace . C804-13804 eliminate common-mode noise from
the position controls .
In
the Χ -Υ positio n of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch , the
external horizontal signal from the Β Trigger Generator cir-
Paraphase Amp l if ier
cuit
is connected to
the base of the +
Input Amplifier,
Q824,
th rough R 821 . The Α and Β sawtoot h signals are
The output of the + and - Input Amplifier stages
is
grounded by the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch . The Β SOURC E
connected to Paraphase Amplifier Q834 and Q844 . Th is
switch
selects
either
the
internal
signal
from Ch annel
1
stage
converts
the
single-ended
input
signal from
either
( ΙΝΤ TR IG
switch
set to CH
1 O R Χ-Y) or an extern al
Input Amplifier stage to α push-pull output signal wh ich is
signal connected to the ΕΧΤ T R IG OR Χ
I NPUT connec-
necessary to drive the horizontal deflection p lates of the
tor . When
the
internal
signal
is selected,
the Chan nel
1
CRT .
In
all positions
of
the HO RIZ
DISPLAY switch
deflectio n factor
as indicated by
the CH
1 VO LTS/DI V
except Χ-Y, α positive-going sawtooth signal is connected to
switch applies as Horizontal V olts/Divisio n . M ore informa-
the base of Q834 through Q814 . Th is produces α negative-
tion on the external horizontal circuitry is contained in the
going sawtooth voltage
at the collector of Q834 . At the
Β Trigger Generator circuit d iscussion .
same
time,
the emitter of Q834 goes positive and
th is
change
is connected
to the emitter of Q844 through the
gain-setting network , R835-13836-R845-13846 .
In all posi-
Horizontal positioning is provided by POSITIO N control
tions of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch except Χ-Y, no signal
R805A, and F I NE control R 805B connected to the base of
is connected
to the base of Q844 through Q824 so Q844
Οί
operates as the emitter- d riven section of α paraphase ampli-
Μαg Register
adj ustment R855 balances
the quiescent
fier . T hen, the positive-going change at its emitter is ampli-
DC
current
to
the base of Q863 and Q873 so α center-
fied
to prod uce
α positive-going sawtoot h signal
at the
screen d isplay does not
change position when
the MAG
collector . T hus the single-ended in put sawtoot h signal has
switch is changed from Χ 10 to O FF .
been amplified and
is available as α push-pull signal at the
collectors of Q834 and Q844 .
In the Χ -Υ position of the HO R IZ DISPLAY switch , the
external horizontal deflection
signal
is connected
to the
base of Q844 through Q824 and the sawtoot h signal at the
base of Q814
is disconnected . Now, the circuit operates
much the same as
j ust described for α sawtoot h input . Α
positive-going external horizontal deflection signal produces
α
negative-going change
at
the base of Q844 wh ich de-
creases
the
current
flow
th roug h
th is
transistor .
The
collector of Q844 goes positive wh ile
the emitter-coup led
signal
to Q834 prod uces
α negative-going change
at the
collector of Q834 .
Th is stage
also provides ad j ustment to set the normal
General
and magnified gain of the H orizontal Amp lifier circuit, and
The Ζ Axis Amplifier circuit controls the C RT intensity
the MAG
switch to provide
α horizontal sweep which
is
level from several in puts . The effect of these in put signals is
magnified
10 times . For normal sweep operation
( MAG
to either increase or decrease the trace intensity, or to com-
switch
set to OFF), R835 and R836 control
the emitter
level
blank
ρ
γ
portions of
the d isplay . F ig . 3-15 shows α
degeneration between Q834 and Q844 to set the gain of the
detailed block diagram of the Ζ Axis Amplifier circuit
. Α
stage . R835, N ormal Gain, is adj usted to provide calibrated
sc
hematic of th is circuit is shown on diagram 15 at the rear
sweep
rates . Wh en M AG switch S801 B
is set to the Χ 10
of th is manual .
positio n , R845 and R846 are co n nected in parallel with
R835 and R836 . Th is additional resistance decreases the
emitter degeneration of th is stage to increase the gain of the
Input Amplifier
circuit
10 times . R845, M ag Gain, is ad justed to provide
calibrated magnified sweep rates . When the MAG switch is
The
input transistor,
Q1014,
in the
Input Am plifier
set
to Χ 10, MAG ON
light DS849
is connected
to
the
stage is α current-d riven, low-input im pedance am plifier . It
+150-volt supp ly through R849 . DS849 ignites to ind icate
provides termination
for
the
input signals as well as iso-
that
the sweep
is magn ified .
In the Χ -Υ position
of
the
lation between the
input signals a nd the following stages .
HO R IZ DISPLAY switch ,
the magn ifier is connected into
The current signals from
the various control sources are
the
circuit by S801A so the horizontal gain is correct for
connected to the emitter of Q1014 and the sum o r d iffer-
external horizontal operation regardless of
the setting of
ence
of
the signals determines the collector conduction
the MAG switch . However, bot h
sides of DS849 are con-
level
. C R 1015 and C R 1016 in the collector provide limiting
nected to ground so it can not ignite .
protection
at minimum
intensity . When the
I NTENSITY
control
is set fully countercloc kwise (minimum), the col-
Output Amplifier
lector current of Q1014 is reduced and
its collector rises
positive . C R 1015
is reverse biased to block the control cur-
The push-pull output of the Para ph ase Amplifier is con-
rent at the base of Q1023, and C R 1016 is forward biased to
nected
to the Output Amplifier . Each half of the Output
protect
the
circuit by clamping
the collector of Q1014
Am plifier can be considered
as
α single-ended , feedback
about 0.5
volt
more positive
than
the emitter
level of
amp lifier wh ich amp lifies the signal current at its input to
Q1023 .
Th is
limiting
action
also
takes p lace when
α
prod uce α voltage output to drive the horizontal deflection
blank ing signal
is applied . The clamping of C R 1016 allows
plates of
the CRT . The amplifiers have
α low
i nput im-
Q1014 to recover faster to prod uce α sharper d isplay with
pedance and require very little voltage change at the input
sudden changes in blan k ing level . At normal intensity levels,
to
p roduce
t h e d esired
output
ch ange .
Diod es
CR 1016
is reverse
biased
and
the
signal from Q1014 is
CR851-C R852
and CR 861-C R 871 protect
the am plifier
cou pled to emitter follower Q1023 th roug h C R 1015 .
from
being overdriven
by excessive current swing at the
collectors of Q834 and Q844 . N egative feedback
is pro-
vided from the collectors of the final transistors, Q884 and
The input signals vary the current drive to the emitter of
Q894,
to
the
bases
of
the
i nput
transistors
through
01014, wh ich
produces α collector
level
that determines
C882-13882 and C892-R 892 . C882
and C892
adjust
the
the brilliance of the display .
I NTENSITY control R1005
transient response of the amp lifier so it has good
li nearity
sets
the quiescent
level at the emitter of Q1014 . When
at fast sweep rates .
R1005
is turned in the clockwise directio n , more current
Circuit Description -453A/R 453A
BEAM F I N D ER switch S330 red uces h orizontal scan by
limiting the current available to Q884 and Q894 . Normally
the
collectors of
these transistors are returned
to +150
volts . However, when the BEAM F I N D ER switch is pressed
in,
the power from
the unregulated +150-volt supply
is
interru pted and th e collector voltage for Q884 and Q894 is
supplied from +75 volts th roug h CR884 . Since th e collec-
tors are returned
to
α lower potential, the output voltage
swing is reduced
to limit the horizontal deflection with in
th e graticule area .
Ζ AXIS AMPL I F I ER
3-25
Circuit Description-453A/ R453A
Vertical Chopped
Blan king Sign al
from Ve rtical Switch ing
Circuit
External B la r ιk ing
R 1011
from Ζ AXIS I NPUT
------^V1V`V
Connector
Α and Β
unblank ing
gate from
Sweep Ge ne rator
circu its
Input
Ou tpu t
Amplifier
Amplifier
INTENSITY
Q1014, Q1023
Q1024,01034
R 1005
Q1043
/
R 1004
R 1012
C1036
R 1036
Fig . 3-15. Ζ Axis Amplifier detailed block diagram .
Unblank ing
gate to CR T
circuit
from
the
I NT ENSITY control
is added to the emitter cir-
cou pled com plementary amp lifier . This configuration pro-
cuit of Q1014, wh ich
results
in an
increase in collector
vides α
linear, fast output signal with minimum q uiesce nt
current to provide α brig hter trace . However, the vertical
power .
chopped
blank ing, Ζ Axis
Input, and sweep unblan king
signals
(Α , Β , and mixed ) determine whether the trace
is
visible . The vertical
chopped blank ing
signal blanks
the
trace during dual-trace switch ing . Th is signal decreases the
The overall Ζ-Axis Amplifier circuit
is α shunt-feedbac k
current through Q1014 during the trace switch ing time to
operational
amp lifier
with
feedback
from
the
Output
blank the CRT d isplay . The external blank ing in put allows
Am plifier
stage
to
the
Input Amp lifier
stage
through
an external signal connected to the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT con-
C1036-C1037- R 1036 . The output voltage
is determined by
nector to change the trace intensity . Α positive-going signal
the input current times the feedback resistor and is shown
connected to the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT connector decreases trace
by the formula : Εουτ =
ιιη Χ Rfb where Rfb
is R1036 . The
intensity and α negative-going
signal increases trace inten-
unblank ing
input
current
change
is approximately two
sity . T he Α , Β , and mixed unblanking gate signals from the
milliamperes . T herefore,
the output voltage change is about
Α and Β Sweep Generator circuits blank the CRT during
60 volts (2 mA Χ 30 .1
kΩ ) . C1036 adj usts the feedbac k
sweep retrace and recovery time so there
is no disp lay on
circuit for optimum h igh-frequency response .
the screen . When the Sweep Generator circuits are reset and
recovered
(see Α and Β Sweep Generator d iscussion for
more information), the next trigger initiates the sweep and
an unblanking gate signal
is generated by the Α or Β Sweep
Ζener d iode VR 1043 connected between +75 volts and
Generator
circuit
that goes negative to allow the emitter
+150 volts through C R 1044, R 1044, and R 1043 produces α
current
of Q1014 to reach the
level establish ed by
the
+90-volt
level
at
the
cathode of VR 1043 . Th is voltage
I NTEN SITY control and the other blank ing inputs .
establishes the correct collector
level for Q1043 . C R 1045
connected from base to emitter of Q1043 improves
the
response of Q1043 to negative-going signals . When the base
Output Ampl if ier
of Q1043 is driven negative to cutoff, C R 1045
is forward
b iased and conducts the negative-going portion of
the υη -
The resultant signal produced from the various inputs by
blank ing
signal . T h is provides α
fast falling edge on the
the
In put Amplifier
stage
is connected
to
the base of
unb lank ing gate to quick ly turn the display off . The output
Q1024
th rough C1029 and to the base of Q1034 th rough
unblank ing gate at the emitter of Q1043 is connected to
R 1024 .
These
transistors are connected
as
α
collector-
the C RT circuit th rough R 1046 .
3-26
C RT CI RCU IT
later when C913 discharges sufficiently to raise the voltage
at
the base of Q930 positive enough to bias Q930
into
General
conduction again . The cycle repeats at α freq uency of 40 to
50
k ilohertz .
The
amplitud e
of
sustained
oscillatio n
T he C RT Circuit provides the high voltage and co ntrol
depends upon
the average current delivered to the base of
circuits necessary for operation of
the cathode-ray tube
Q930 .
(CRT) . F ig . 3-16 shows α detailed block diagram of the
C RT Circuit . Α sc hematic of th is circuit
is shown on d ia-
gram 16 at the rear of th is manual .
F use F 937 protects
the +12-volt Supply
if
the High -
voltage Oscillator stage is shorted . C937 and L937 prevent
the current changes at the collector of Q390 from affecting
High-Voltage Oscillator
the+12-volt regulator circuit .
Q930 and associated circuitry comprise the h igh -voltage
oscillator to prod uce the drive for high-voltage transformer
Τ930 . When the
instrument
is
turned on,
the current
High-Voltage Regulator
through R925 charges C913 positive and Q930
is forward
F eedback from the secondary of Τ930 is connected to
biased . The collector
current of Q930
increases and
α
the base
of Q914
through
the voltage d ivider networ k
voltage is developed across the collector windi ng of Τ930 .
8903-R910 . Th is sam ple of the output voltage is compared
Th is prod uces α corresponding voltage increase
i n the feed -
to
the -12-volt level at the emitter of Q914 . Any change i n
back winding of Τ930 wh ich
is con nected to the base of
the level at the base of Q914 produces an error signal at the
Q930, and
it conducts even harder . Wh ile Q930
is on, its
collector of Q914 wh ich
is amplified by Q914 and Ο913
base current exceeds the current through R925 and C913
and applied to the base of Q923 . Amplitude of the oscilla-
charges negatively . Eventually
the rate of collector current
tions at the collector of 0930 is determined by the average
increase
in Q930 becomes less than
that required to main-
DC level at the emitter of Q923 .
tain the voltage across the collector winding, and the out-
put voltage d rops . Th is turns off Q930 by way of the feed-
back
voltage to
the base . The voltage waveform
at the
collector of Q930 is α sine wave at the resonant freq uency
R egulatio n occurs as follows :
If the output voltage at
of Τ930 . Q930 remains off u ntil α little less than one cycle
the -1960 V test point starts to 9ο positive (less n egative),
F937
U n reg ulated
voltage from
+12 Volt
Rectifier,
Power Supp ly
Circu it
Unblank ing gate
from Ζ Axis
Amplifier
Fig . 3-16
. C RT Circ u it detailed bloc k diagram .
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
ASTIG
Exter n al
B lank ing
0-
to Ζ Axis
Amp lifier
3-27
α sample of th is positive-going voltage is a pplied to the base
of 0914 . Q914
is forward biased and
it, in turn, forward
biases Q913 and Q923 . Th is results in α greater bias current
to the base of Q930 through the feedback wind ing of Τ930 .
Now, Q930
is biased closer to its conduction
level so
it
comes
into conduction sooner to produce α larger induced
voltage
in the secondary of Τ930 . Th is increased voltage
appears
as
α more negative voltage at the -1960 V
test
point
to
correct
the
original positive-going
change . By
sampling
th e
output
from
the cath ode
su pply
in
th is
manner, the total output of the high-voltage su pply is held
constant .
Output voltage
level of the h igh-voltage su pply
is con-
trolled by H igh Voltage adj ustment R900 in the base circuit
of Q914 . Th is adjustment sets the conduction of Q914 to α
level wh ich establishes α -1960-volt operating potential at
the C RT cathode .
High Voltage Rectifiers and Output
H igh -voltage
transformer
Τ930
has
three
output
wind ings . One winding provides filament voltage for the
cathode-ray tube . The
filament voltage can be
supp lied
from the h ig h -voltage su pply since the cathode-ray tube has
α very low filament current drain . The cathode and filament
are connected together through R975 to elevate the fila-
ment
and prevent
cathode-to-filament
breakdown . Two
high-voltage wind ings provid e
the
negative and positive
accelerating voltage and the C R T grid bias voltage . All of
these outputs are regulated by the H igh -Voltage Regulator
stage in
the primary of Τ930 to hold
the output voltage
constant .
3-28
CRT Control Circuits
Focus of the C R T display
is controlled by F OCUS con-
trol R967 . ASTIG adjustment R985 which is used in con-
junction with the FOCU S control to provide α well-defined
d isplay, varies
the positive level on
the astigmatism grid .
Geometry adjustment R982 varies the positive level on the
horizontal d eflection plate
sh ields
to control
the overall
geometry of the d isplay .
Two adjustments control the trace alignment by varying
the magnetic field around the C RT . Υ Axis Align ad just-
ment
R989
controls
the
current
through
L989 which
affects the CRT beam after vertical deflection but before
horizontal deflection . Therefore,
it affects only the vertical
(Υ ) components of the display . TRAC E ROTATIO N ad-
justment R980
controls
the current
through
L980 and
affects both vertical and horizontal rotation of the beam .
External Ζ Axis Input
Signals app lied to the Ζ AXIS
I NPUT connector (see Ζ
Axis Amplifier schematic) are applied to the C RT cathode
through C979-C976- R 976 . DC and low
freq uency Z-axis
signals are b loc ked from the C RT Circuit by C979 . How-
ever, they are connected to the Ζ Axis Am plifier circuit to
produce an
increase or decrease
i n intensity, depending
upon polarity . C976 and C979 cou ple high-freq uency sig-
nals d irectly
to
the CRT cathode
to produce
the same
resultant d isplay as the Ζ Axis Amplifier circuit produces
for low-frequency signals . Th is configuration operates as α
crossover
network
to
provide
nearly
constant
intensity
modulation from DC to 50 megahertz .
Positive
accelerating
potential
is
supp lied by
voltage
triplex CR953, C R 955, and C R957 . Regulated voltage out-
LOW-VO LTAG E POWER SUPPL Y
put is about +12 kilovolts . Ground return for th is su pply is
through the
resistive helix
inside the cathode-ray tube to
General
ground th rough VR963 .
The Low-Voltage
Power
Supply
circuit provides
the
operating power for
th is instrument from
three regulated
The negative accelerating potential for the C R T cathode
supp lies and one unregulated su pply . E lectronic regulation
is supp lied by half-wave rectifier CR952 . Voltage output is
is used to provide stable, low-ripple output voltages . Each
about -1 .96 kilovolts . Α sam ple of th is output voltage is
regulated supply contains α sh ort-protection circuit to pre-
connected to
the H igh -Voltage Regulator stage to provid e α
vent instrument damage
if α su pply is inadvertently sh orted
regulated high-voltage output .
to ground . The Power In put stage includes th e L ine Voltage
Selector assembly . T h is assembly allows selection of the
nominal operating voltage and regulating range for the in-
Half-wave rectifier C R 940 provides α negative voltage for
strument
. Fig . 3-17 shows α detailed block d iagram of the
the control grid of the CRT . Output level of th is supp ly is
Power Su pp ly circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit
is shown
set by C R T Grid Bias ad justment R940 . Neon bulbs DS973,
on d iagram 17 at the rear of th is manual .
DS974, and DS975 provide protection if th e voltage d if-
ference
between
the
control
grid and
cathode exceed s
Power Input
about
165
volts . The unblanking gate from
the Ζ Axis
Amplifier
is app lied to the positive
side of
th is circuit to
Power
is app lied to the primary of transformer Τ 1101
produce α change in output voltage to control CR T inten-
th roug h
the
115-volt
line
fuse
F 1101, POWER
switch
sity, unblank ing, d ual-trace blanking, and intensity mod ula-
S1101,
thermal
cutout
S1104, Voltage Selector
switch
tion .
S1102,
and
Range Selector
switch S1103 . The Voltage
+12 V -~
Current
L imiting
01159
F ig . 3-17 . Power Supply d etailed block diagram .
+75 V
Feedbac k
Amplifier
01184,
\Ο 1193
Unregu late d
+12 volts
to H igh-Voltage
~` -12 V
Oscillator, CRT
Circuit
Series
Regulator
rl_~
A
01137
6.3 Volt
RMS
Sou rce
R 1107
R1108
R1104
POWWER
R 1105
(~) 1
N
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
+12 V
Feedback
Amplifier
01154,
\01163
-12 V
-12 V
Current
-,2 V
Limiting
-,2-V
Reference
01129
Feedback
VR 1114
Amplifier
01114, 01124,
01133
+75 V
+12 V
R 1129
--'j ί
~ -12 ν
SCALE
DS1107
Ι Ι LLUM Ι ~
1 DS1108
1DS1109~ Line trigger signal
to Trigger Generators
3-29
divider 131121-131122-R1123 . R1122
in
this divider
is ad-
T1101
in parallel for 115-volt nominal
operation,
or
in
justable to set the output
level of this supply . Regulation
series for 230-volt nominal operation . Α second line fuse,
occurs
as follows
:
If the output level of this su pply de-
F1102,
is connected
into
this
circuit when the Voltage
creases (less negative) due to an increase in load , or α de-
Selector switch
is set to the 230 V position to provide the
crease in input voltage (as α result of line voltage changes or
correct protection for 230-volt operation (F 1102 current
ripp le), the voltage across divider R 1121-R 1 122-R 1 123 Be
rating is one-half of F 1101) .
creases also
. This results in α more positive feedback level at
the base of Q1124 than established by the -12 V Refer-
ence stage at the base of Q1114 . Since the transistor with
Range Selector switch S1103 allows the instrument to
the more positive base controls the conduction of the d if-
regulate
correctly
on h igher
or
lower than normal
line
ferential amp lifier, the output current at the collector of
voltages . E ach half of the primary has taps above and below
Q1114 decreases .
This decrease
in
output from Q1114
the nominal voltage point (115
or 230 volts) . As Range
allows more current to flow through Q1133 to result in
Selector
switch S1103
is switched from LO to Μ to HI,
increased conduction of -12 V Series Regulator Q1137,
more turns are effectively added
to the primary wind ing
The load current increases and the output voltage of this
and the turns
ratio
is decreased . This configuration com-
supp ly also increases (more negative) . As α result, the feed-
pensates for
h igher or lower than normal
line voltage to
back voltage to the base of Q1124 returns to the same level
extend
the
regulating
range of the
Low-Voltage P ower
as the base of Q1 1 14 . Similarly, if the output level of this
Supply .
supp ly
increases
(more negative), the output current
of
Q1114 increases . The feedback through Q1133 reduces the
conduction of the -12 V Series Regulator to decrease the
Thermal cutout S1104 provid es thermal protection for
output voltage of this su pply,
this instrument .
If the internal tem perature of the instru-
ment exceed s α safe operating level, S1104 o pens to inter-
ru pt the a pp lied power . When the temperature returns to α
safe
level,
S1 104
automatically
closes
to
re-apply
the
The -12 Volts adjustment R 1122 determines the d ivider
power .
ratio
to the base of Q1124, and thereby determines the
feedback voltage . This adjustment sets the output level of
the su pp ly in the following manner : If R 1122 is adjusted so
-12-Volt Supply
the voltage at
its variable arm goes less negative (closer to
ground ),
this
appears as an
error
signal
at the base of
The following discussion includes the d escription of the
01124 .
In the same manner as described previously, this
-12 V Rectifier, -12 V Series Regulator, -12 V Feedback
positive-going change at the feedback input of the differen-
Am plifier, -12 V Reference, and -12 V Current L imiting
tial am plifier increases the conduction of the -12 V Series
stages . Since these stages are closely
related
in the pro-
Regulator to produce more current through the load, and
duction
of the
-12-volt
regulated output voltage,
their
thereby increase the output voltage of
this supp ly . This
operation
is most easily understood when discussed as α
p laces more voltage across d ivider 131121-131122-131123,
unit .
and the d ivider action returns the base of Q1124 to about
-9 volts . Notice that the feedback action of this supp ly
forces α change in the output level which always returns the
The -12 V Rectifier assembly CR1112 rectifies the out-
base of Q1124 to the same level as the base of Q1114 .
I n
put at the secondary of T1 101
to provide the unregulated
this manner, the out put level of the -12-Volt Su pply can
voltage source for this supply . CR1112
is connected
as α
be set exactly
to -12
volts
by
correct adjustment
of
bridge
rectifier and its output voltage is filtered by C1112
R1122 .
before
it is applied to the -12 V Series Regulator Q1137 .
Transistors
Q1114,
Q1124,
and
Q1133
operate
as
α
feed back-stabilized regulator circuit to maintain α constant
The -12 V Current L imiting stage Q1129 protects the
-12-volt output level . Q1114 and Q1124 are connected as
-12-Volt Supply
if excess current
is demanded from this
α d ifferential amp lifier to compare the feedback voltage at
su pply . All output current from the -12-Volt Supply must
the base of Q1124 against the reference voltage at the base
flow through R 1129 . Transistor Q1129 senses the voltage
of Q1114 . The error output at the collector of Q1114 re-
dro p across R1129 . U nder normal operating cond itions,
flects the d ifference, if any, between these two inputs . The
there
is about 0 .3-volt drop across R 1129, which
is not
change
in error-output
level at the collector of Ο1124
is
sufficient to forward
bias Q1129 . H owever, when excess
always in the same d irection as the change in the feedback
current is demanded from the -12 V Series Regulator due
input at the base of Q1124 (in phase) .
to
α short circuit or similar malfunction at the output of
this su pply, the voltage dro p across R 1129 increases until it
is sufficient to forward bias Q1129 . The collector current
Zener diode VR1114 sets α reference level of about -9
of Q1129 results in α red uction of current through Q1133
volts at the base of 01114 . Α sam ple of the output voltage
to decrease the conduction of Q1137 and limit the output
from this su pply is connected to the base of Q1124 through
current .
3-30
th e fan . The fu ll-wave output of the +150 V Rectifier
is
filtered by C1202-C1204- R 1204 to provide an output level
The unregulated voltage app lied to the +12-Volt Supply
of about +150 volts . Fuse F 1204 protects th is su pply if the
is also connected to the H igh -Voltage Oscillator stage in the
output is shorted .
CRT circuit .
Two means of overload protectio n are provided for th is
supply . The +75 V Current Limiting stage Q1189 operates
in α manner similar to that described previously to control
the
co nd uction
of
the +75 V Series Regulator
through
C R 1188 and Q1193 . Ιη add ition, F 1437 provides overload
protection
for
th is
su pply
.
Diode CR1198 protects
the
+75-Volt Supp ly
from damage
if
it
is
shorted to
the
-12-Volt Supply .
+150-Volt Unregulated Supp ly
6.3-Volt RMS AC Source
Oscillator
Circuit Description-453Α/R453A
Basic operation of all stages
in the +12-Volt Supply
is
similar to the -12-Volt Supply . H owever, the +12 V F eed -
The 6.3-volt RMS secondary winding of T1 101 provides
bac k Amplifier provides inversion in the feedback path . The
power
for
the POWER ON
ligh t, DS1107, and the scale
reference level for th is supply is established by the ground
illumination
lights,
DS1108
and
DS1109 .
The
current
connection at the emitter of 01154 . Feedbac k voltage to
th rough
the scale illumination lights
is controlled by
the
t h e
base
of
Q1154
is
p rovi d ed
by
divider
SCALE
Ι LLUM control, R1108,tochange theillumination
R1151-R 1152-R 1153 between
the output of th is supply
of
the
graticule
lines .
Divider
R1104- R 1105 provides α
and regulated -12 volts . The -12 volts is held stable by the
samp ling of the
line voltage to the Α and Β Trigger Gen-
-12-Volt Su pply
as d iscussed previously . T herefore, any
erator circuits for internal triggering at the line freq uency .
change at the output of the +12-Volt Supp ly appears at the
C1105 reduces noise on the line frequency signal .
base of Q1154
as an error
signal . The output voltage is
regulated
in
the
manner described
previously
for
the
-12-V olt Su pply . Diode C R 1152 provides thermal compen
sation for th e +12 V Feedback Am plifier . C R 1164 protects
VO LTAGE DIST R I BU TION
Q1154 from damage
if the output of th is supp ly is shorted
to α more positive sup ply .
Diagram
17 also shows the d istrubution of th e output
voltages
from
the Power
Supply
curcuit to
the circuit
boards in th is instrument . The decoupling networks which
provid e
decoupled operating voltages
are
shown on
th is
+75-Volt Supply
Diagram
and
are
not
repeated
on
the
ind ivid ual
circ u it
Operation of
the +75-Volt Supply
is the same as de-
d iagrams .
scribed for the other supp lies . The unregulated output of
the +150-Volt Supply is connected to the +75 V F eedback
CAL I BRATO R
Am plifier to provide sufficient collector supply for stable
operation . The unregulated +150 volts connected to zener
General
diode VR 1209
through R 1209 establis h es α voltage level at
the cathod e of V R 1209 of abo ut +108 volts . The drop
The
Calibrator
circuit produces α square-wave output
across R1186 sets th e correct base level for Q1193 and the
with
accurate amplitud e
and
frequency . T h is output
is
d rop across V R 1185-R 1 185 sets the correct collector level
available as α square-wave voltage at the 1 kH z CAL connec-
for Q1184 . Diode C R 1182 provides thermal compensation
for or
as α
sq uare-wave
current
th rough the
side-panel
for the +75 V Feedback Amp lifier .
PRO BE LOOP . F ig . 3-18 shows α detailed block d iagram of
the Calibrator circuit . Α schematic of th is circuit
is shown
on d iagram 18 at the rear of th is manual .
Q1255
and
its associated circ u itry comprise
α tuned-
collector oscillator . Frequency of oscillation
is determined
by the LC circuit made up of the primary of variable trans-
former Τ 1255
in parallel with C1255 . The accuracy and
stability
required
to provide
an
accurate
time and
fre-
quency reference is obtained by using α ca pacitor and trans-
former which
have
equal
but
opposite temperature
co-
efficients .
Rectifiers
CR 1202 and C R 1212 provide the
rectified
voltage for the +150-Volt Su pply . However, th is secondary
T he oscillations of the LC circuit, Τ 1255-C1255, are sus-
winding
of Τ 1101
does
not
su pply
the
full potential
tai ned by the feed back wind ing of Τ 1255 connected to the
necessary to obtain the +150-volt output level . To provide
base of Q1255 . C1266 connects α sam ple of th e output of
the required output level,
the negative side of th is supply is
th e LC circuit to
the base of Q1265 . The regenerative feed-
connected to the output of the +75-Volt Supply so the two
back from
the emitter of Q1265 to the emitter of Q1255
su pplies are effectively connected in series between ground
produces
fast
changeover between Ο1255 and 01265 to
and the +150-volt output . The output from th is secondary
provide
α
fast risetime on
the output
square wave . Fre-
wind ing of TI 101 also provides the operating potential for
quency of
the
output
square wave can be adjusted by
3-3 1
Fig . 3-18 .
Calibrator detailed block diagram .
PROBE LOOP -
5 mASL
varying the coup ling to the feedback winding of Τ 1255 .
Output D ivider
The
square-wave signal
at the collector of Q1265
is con-
nected to the Output Amplifier .
Output Divider 131275-R1276-131277 provides two out-
put voltages from the Calibrator circuit . In the
1 V CALI
Output Amplifier
BRATOR
switch
position, voltage
is obtained from the
The
output
signal
from the oscillator stage saturates
collector
of Q1274 through R1274 .
In the
.1 V CALI-
Q1274 to produce the accurate
square wave at the output .
BRATOR
switch position, the output is obtained at the
When the base of Q1274 goes positive, Q1274 is cut off and
junction of voltage
divider R1275
and 131276-131277 to
the output signal drops negative to ground . When its base
provide one-tenth of the previous output voltage .
goes negative, Q1274 is driven into saturation and the out-
put signal rises positive to about +12 volts . The output of
the +12-Volt Supply
is adjusted for an accurate one-volt
Collector current of Q1274 flows through
the PROBE
output
signal
at
the
1
kHz CAL
connector when the
LOOP
on
the
side
panel .
Output
current
is
α
five-
CALIBRATOR switch is set to
1 V .
milliampere square wave .
Th is section of the manual contains mai ntenance infor-
mation for use in preventive maintenance, corrective mai n -
tenance, or troubleshooting of the 453Α .
General
P reventive
maintenance
consists
of
cleaning,
visual
inspection,
lubrication, etc . P reventive maintenance, per-
formed on α regu lar basis may prevent instrument break -
down
and will im prove th e reliability of th is instrument .
The severity of th e environment to wh ich
the 453Α is sub-
jected d etermines the frequency of maintenance . Α conven-
ient time to perform preventive maintenance
is preced ing
recalib ration of the instrument .
Cleaning
PREVENTIVE M AI N TENANC E
General . The 453Α should be cleaned as often as oper-
ating conditions req uire . Accumulation of d irt in th e instru -
ment can
cause over-heating and com ponent breakdown .
Dirt on components acts as an insu lating blanket and pre-
vents efficient heat dissi pation . It also provides an electrical
cond u ction pat h .
CAUTION
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE
Change information, if any, affecting this section will be found at the rear of this manual.
453Α/R453A
the covers in place necessitates more freq uent cleaning . The
front cover provides dust protection for the front panel and
the C R T face . Th e front cover sh ould be installed for stor-
age or transportation .
Cover Removal
Air Filter . The
air
filter
should
be visually
check ed
The to p and bottom covers of the instrument are held in
every few weeks
and cleaned or
replaced
if d irty . More
p lace by thumb screws located on each side of
th
frequent
inspectio ns are
required under severe operati ng
e instru-
ment . To remove th e covers,
conditions . The following procedure
is suggested for clea n -
slide the covers off the instrument .
the th umb screws and
ing
the filter . If th e filter
is to be replaced , order new air
. The covers protect the
filters from your local Tektronix Field Office or represen t-
instrument from d ust in the interior . The covers also direct
ative ; ord er by Tektronix Part No . 378-0033-00
.
the flow of cooli ng air a nd reduce the EMI radiation from
the instrument .
1
. Remove the
filter by pulling
it out of the retaining
frame on the rear panel . Be careful not to drop any of the
accumulated d irt into the instrument .
2 . F lus h the loose dirt from the filter wit h α stream of
hot water .
3 . P lace the filter in α solution of mild detergent and hot
water and let it soak for several minutes .
4 . Squeeze the filter to was h out any dirt wh ich remains.
5 . Rinse the filter in clear water and allow it to dry .
6 . Coat the d ry filter with an air-filter adhesive (available
from air conditioner su ppliers, or order Tektronix Part No .
006-0580-00) .
7 . Let the adhesive d ry thorough ly .
8 . Re-install the filter in the retain ing frame .
Avoid
the use of chemical cleaning agents which
might damage the plastics used in
this instrument.
Avoid
chemicals
which contain benzene,
toluene,
E xterior . Loose d ust accumulated on the outside of the
xylene, acetone, or similar solvents.
453Α can be removed with α soft cloth or small brush
. The
brush
is
particularly
useful
for d islodging
dirt on
and
around the fro nt-panel controls . Dirt wh ich remains can be
The top and bottom covers provide protection again st
removed with α
soft cloth dampened in
α mild d etergent
d ust in
the interior of the instrument . O peration wit hout
and water solution . Abrasive cleaners should not be used .
M ai ntenance-453Α/R453Α
CR T . Clean the p lastic
ligh t filter, faceplate protector,
Fan . The fan-motor bearings are sealed and d o not re
a nd the C RT face with α soft, lint-free cloth dampened with
quire lubrication .
denatured alcohol . The optional C RT mesh filter can be
cleaned in the following manner .
d ust-proof container such as α plastic bag .
Visual Inspection
1 . Hold the filter in α vertical position and brush lightly
The
453Α
should
be
inspected occasionally for such
with α soft Νο .7 water-color brus h to remove lig ht coatings
defects as b roken connections, bro k en or damaged ceramic
of d ust or
li nt .
stri ps,
impro perly
seated
transistors,
damaged
circuit
board s, and heat-damaged parts .
2 . Greasy resid ues or dried-on dirt can be removed with
α solution of warm water and α neutral-pH liquid detergent .
The corrective procedure for most visible defects is ob vi
Use th e brush to lightly scrub the filter .
ous ; h owever, particular care must be taken if heat-damaged
components are found . Over-heating usually indicates oth er
trouble in the instrument ; therefore, it is important that the
3 . Rinse the filter thorough ly
i n clean water and allow to
cause of over-heating be corrected to prevent recurrence of
air dry,
the damage .
4 .
If any
li n t or d irt remains, use clean low-pressure air
Trans i stor Checks
to remove . Do not use tweezers,
or other hard cleani ng
Period ic checks of the transistors
in the 453Α are not
tools on the filter, as the special finish may be damaged .
recommended . The best check of transistor performance is
actual operation in the instrument . More details on check -
5 . When not in use, store the mesh filter in α lint-free,
i ηg transistor operation are given under Troub leshooting .
Recalibration
Interior . Dust in the
interior of the instrument should
To
assure accurate measurements, check
the calibration
be removed occasionally due to
its electrical cond uctivity
of th is instrument after each 1000 hours of o peration or
under h igh -humid ity cond ition s . The best way to clean the
every six months if used infrequently . In addition, rep lace-
interior is to blow off the accumulated dust with d ry, low-
ment of components may necessitate recalibration of the
velocity
air . Remove any dirt which remains with α soft
affected
circuits .
Complete
calibration
instructions
are
brush or α cloth dampened with α mild detergent and water
given in the Calibratio n section .
solutio n . Α cotton-tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in
narrow spaces or for cleaning ceramic terminal strips and
circuit boards .
T he calibratio n proced ure can also be helpful
in local-
izing
certain
troubles
in
the
instrument .
In some
cases,
The high-voltage
circuits, particularly parts located
in
minor troubles may be revealed and/or corrected by recali-
the high-voltage compartment and the area surround ing the
oration .
post-deflection
anod e
connector,
should
receive
special
attentio n . E xcessive dirt
in
these areas may cause h ig h -
TRO UBLESHOOTI N G
voltage arcing and result in improper instrument operation .
Lubrication
4-2
Introduction
The
following
informatio n
is
provided
to
facilitate
General . The
reliability
of potentiometers,
rotary
troublesh ooting of
the 453Α .
Information
contained
in
switches and other moving parts can be maintained if th ey
other sections of th is manual should be used along wit h the
are kept properly lubricated. U se α cleaning-type lubricant
following information to aid in locating the defective com-
(e .g ., Tektronix Part No . 006-0218-00) on switch contacts .
ponent . An understanding of the circuit operation is very
L ubricate switch detents with α heavier grease
(e .g ., Tek -
hel pful
in
locati ng troubles . See
the Circuit Descri ption
tronix Part No
.
006-0219-00) . Potentiometers wh ich are
section for complete information .
not permanently
sealed should be
lubricated with α lubri-
cant which does not affect electrical characteristics (e .g .,
Tektronix Part No . 006-0220-00) . The pot lubricant can
also
be used on shaft bushings. Do not over-lubricate . Α
Troubleshooting Aids
lubrication
kit
containing
the necessary
lubricants
a nd
instructions
is available from Tektronix,
I n c . Order Tek -
Diagrams . Comp lete circuit diagrams are given on fold -
tronix Part No . 003-0342-01 .
out pages
in the Diagrams section . The component number
and electrical value of each component in th is instrumen t
necting wires and /or connectors . The circuit board s are also
are show n on the diagrams (see first page of th e Diagrams
outlined on the diagrams with
α blue
li ne to
show w hich
section for definition of
the reference designators used to
portions of the circuit are located on α circuit board .
ide n tify components in th is instrument) . Each main circuit
is assigned α series of component numbers . Tab le 4-1
lists
the main circuits in the 453Α and the series of com po nent
Wiring Color-Code . All insulated wire and cable used in
numbers assigned
to each .
Important voltages and wave-
the 453Α is color-coded to facilitate circuit tracing . Signal
forms are also shown on the diagrams . The portions of the
carrying
lead s
are
identified
with
one
or two
colored
circuit mounted on circuit boards are enclosed with blue
stripes .
Voltage
su pply
leads
are
identified
with
three
lines .
stripes to
ind icate the approximate voltage using the ΕΙΑ
resistor color cod e
. Α white backgrou nd color indicates α
positive voltage and α tan background ind icates α negative
TABLE 4-1
voltage . The widest color stripe
identifies the first color of
Component Numbers
the code . Table 4-2 gives
the wiring color code for the
power-supp ly voltages used in the 453Α .
Component
Numbers on
Ι Diagram
Diagrams
N umber
Circuit
TABLE 4-2
Power Supply Wiring Color Code
1-99
1
Channel 1 Vertical Pream p
100-199
3
C hannel 2 Vertical Pream p
Back -
200-299
5
Vertical Switch ing
ground
First
Second
Th ird
300-399
6
Vertical Output Amplifier
Su pply
Color
Stripe
Stripe
Stripe
400-429
7
Trigger Preamp
430-499
8
Α Trigger Generator
-12 volt
Tan
Brown
Red
Black
500-599
9
Α Sweep Generator
+12 volt
White
Brown
Red
Blac
k
600-699
10
Β Trigger Generator
+75 volt
White
V iolet
Green
Black
700-799
11
Β Sweep Generator
+150 volt
Wh ite
Brown
Green
Brown
800-899
13
H orizontal Amp lifier
900-999
16
C R T Circuit
1000-1099
15
Ζ Axis Amplifier
Resistor Color-Code .
In
add ition to the brown compo-
1100-1199
17
Power Su pply and
sition
resistors, some metal-film resistors and some wire-
Distrib ution
wound resistors are used in the 453Α . Th e resistance values
1250-1299 1
18
1
Calibrator
of wire-wound
resistors are printed
on
the bod y of
the
component . The resistance values of composition resistors
and metal-film resistors are color-coded on the com ponents
Switch Wafer
Identification . Switch wafers shown on t he
with ΕΙΑ color-code (some metal-film resistors may have
diagrams are coded to indicate the position of the wafer in
the value printed on the body) . The color-cod e is read start-
the complete switch assembly . The numbered portion of
ing with the stri pe nearest the end of the resistor . Compo-
the code
refers to
the wafer number counting from
the
sition resistors have four stripes w hich consist of two sign if-
front, or mounting end of the switch , toward the rear
. The
icant figures, α multiplier, and α tolerance valu e
(see F ig .
letters F and R
indicate whether
the front or rear of the
4 - 1) . M etal-film resistors have five stripes consisting of th ree
wafer
performs
the
particular
switch ing
function .
F or
significant figures, α multip lier, and α tolerance value .
example, α wafer designated 213
ind icates that
the rear of
the second wafer from the front is used for
th is particular
switch ing fu nction .
Capacitor Marking . T he capacitance values of common
d isc capacitors a nd small electrolytics are marked in micro-
farads on
the side
of
the com ponent body . The white
ceramic
capacitors used
in
the 453Α are color coded
in
Circuit Boards . F ig . 4-4 shows the location of the circuit
picofarads using mod ified ΕΙΑ code (see F ig . 4-1) .
boards with in
th is
instrument along with the assembly
numbers
. The assembly numbers are also used on
the d ia-
grams and
in
the parts
list to aid
in locating the boards .
Diode
Color
Code . The cathod e
end
of
each
glass-
Pictures of the circuit boards are shown
in Figs . 8-1
through
encased diode is ind icated by α stripe, α series of stri pes, or
8-14 . These pictures are located in the Diagrams section, on
α dot . F or most silicon or germanium d iodes with α series of
the back of the page opposite the circuit d iagram, to aid the
stripes,
the color-code also
identifies
the Tektronix Part
cross-referencing
between
the diagrams
and
the
circuit-
Number using
the resistor color-code system (e .g ., α d iod e
board p ictures . Each electrical component on
the boards is
color-cod ed pink -, or blue-brown-gray-green ind icates Tek -
identified by
its
circuit number
as well
as the
intercon-
tronix Part N umber 152-0185-00) . The cathod e and anod e
4-3
Comp ositio n Resisto rs:
Silve r
Ι
- - -
Ι
10 - 2
Ι
- - -
Ι ±10%
---
' I
'
.
Gold
I
---
Ι
10-1
Ι
---
±5%
--
Blac k
0
1
1
---
±20% o r
2 pF*
Brow n
1
10
10
±1 %
:±-l % or
_
0 .1 pF*
Red
Ι
2
Ι
10 2
10
2
±2%
Ι
±2%
O range
3
Ι
10 3
Ι
10 3
Ι ±3%
Ι
=3 %
Yellow
Ι
4
Ι
10'
Ι
10'
Ι ±4 01.
+100
0/0
-0%ο
_
±0.5
Metal-Film
Resisto rs:
Ceramic Capacito rs:
1
. Transistor Tester
Troubleshooting E quipment
Transistor Lead Configuration . F ig . 4-2 shows the lead
configu rations of
the transistors used in th is instrument .
Th is view is as seen from the bottom of the transistors .
The following equi pment is useful for troubleshooting
the 453Α .
Descri ption :
Tektronix
Ty pe
576
Tra nsistor-Curve
Tracer or eq uivalent .
Purpose : To test
the semicond uctors used in th is instru-
ment .
F ig . 4-1 . Color code for resistors and ceramic capacitors.
Resisto r a nd Capacitor Color Code
Bl ue
Ι
6
Ι
Violet
Ι
7
Ι
Gray
Ι
8
Ι
---
Ι
10 -2
Ι
---
Ι
+80%
-20%
or 0.25 pF *
(D@ and
3Ο -1st, 2nd and 3rd sign ificant fig ures;
*For capacita nce of 10 pF or less.
-mu ltip lier;
ΟΤ
-tole rance ;
9-temperature coefficient .
NOTE : Ο and/or @.
color code fo r ca pacito r s depends upon
manu facture r and
capacitor
type.
May
not be
prese n t
in some cases .
end of metal-encased d iodes can be
identified by the diode
within 3% . Test probes must be insulated to prevent acci-
symbol marked on the body .
dental shorting .
Purpose : To
check
voltages
and
for general
trouble-
shooting
in th is i n stru ment .
NO ΤΕ
Α 20,000 ohmslνο lt VOM can be used to check the
voltages in th is instrument if allowances are made for
the circuit loading of the VOM at high-impedance
points .
3
. Test Oscilloscope
Descri ption : DC to 20 megahertz freq uency response . 5
millivolts to 10 volts/d ivision deflection factor . U se α 10Χ
probe .
P urpose : To check waveforms in th is instrument .
2 . M ultimeter
Troubleshooting Techniques
Description : VTVM, 10 mego h m in put imped ance and 0
T h is troubleshooting proced ure is arranged
i n an order
to 500 volts range ; oh mmeter, 0 to 50 megohms . Accuracy,
wh ich
ch eck s
t he
sim ple
possibilities before proceed ing
4-4
D r ain
® ®
Drain
Plastic-Cased Transistors
Metal-Cased Transistors
F ield-Effect
Transistors
Fig . 4-2 . Electrode config uration for semiconductors in th is in str ument .
ι ι
~ι
~
,~. /
~/
C
Maintenance-453Α/R 453A
with extensive troubleshooti ng . The first few check s assure
used with th is instrument is operati ng correctly . Check that
proper
connection,
operation,
and
calibration .
If
the
the
signal
is properly connected and
that
th e
intercon -
trouble is not located by th ese check s, the remaining steps
necting cables
are not defective . Also, check the power
aid in locating the defective component . When the defective
source .
component
is located ,
it
should be replaced following the
rep laceme n t
proced ures given
u nder Corrective M ainten-
3 . Visual Check . Visually
check
the
an ce .
Υ
portion
of
the
instrument in wh ich
the trouble
is located . Many troubles
can
be located by
visual
ind ications such
as unsoldered
1 . Check Control Settings . Incorrect control settings can
connection s, bro k en wires, d amaged circ u it boards, dam-
ind icate α
trouble
that
does
not
exist .
If
th ere
is any
aged compone nts, etc .
question about
the correct function or o peration of any
control,
see
the
Operating
I nstructio n s
section
of
th is
4 . Check Instrument Calibration . Check the calib ration
manual .
of
th is
i n strument, or
the affecte d circuit
if the troub le
exists in one circuit . The appare nt trouble may only be a
result
of
mis-adjustment or may
be corrected by
cali-
2 . Check Associated Equipment . Before proceed ing with
bration . Complete
calibration instructio ns are given in the
troubleshooting of
the 453Α , check that
the eq uipment
Calibration section of th is manual .
Ϊ,\
~ί'
So urce
So urce
4-5
5 . Isolate Trouble to α Circuit . To
isolate trouble to α
The circuit board pictures
in Section 8 show
the correct
circuit,
note
the trouble symptom . T he symptom often
con nections for each board .
identifies the circu it in which the troub le
is located . F or
examp le, poor focus
i ndicates that the C RT
(i ncludes h igh
voltage)
circuit
is probably at fault . When trouble sym p-
T he pin connectors used in th is instrument also provide
toms appear
in more than one circuit, check affected cir-
α convenient means
of
circuit isolation . F or exam p le,
α
cuits by tak ing voltage and waveform read ings . Also check
short
in α power su pply can be isolated to the power supply
for the correct output signals at the side-panel output con-
itself by d isconnecting the pin connectors for that voltage
nectors with α test oscilloscope . If the signal
is correct, the
at the remaining boards .
circuit
is work ing correctly up to that point . F or exam ple,
correct amplitud e
a nd
time of the Α gate out waveform
indicates that the Α Trigger Generator and Α Sweep Gate
7 . Check Voltages and Waveforms . Often the defective
circuits are operating correctly .
component can be located by check ing for the correct volt-
age or waveform in the circuit . Ty pical voltages and wave-
forms are given on the d iagrams.
Incorrect operation of all circuits often ind icates trouble
in the power su pply . Ch eck first for correct voltage of the
individual supplies . However, α defective component else-
where
in
the
instrument can
a ppear
as α power-su pp ly
trouble and may also affect
the operation of other circuits .
Table 4-3 lists the tolerances of
the power su pplies in th is
instrument
.
If α power-su pply voltage
is with in the listed
tolerance, the su pply can be assumed to be work ing
cor-
rectly .
If outside
the tolerance,
the
supply may be mis-
adjusted or operating incorrectly . Use
the procedure given
in the Calibration section to adjust the power supp lies .
Power Supply
TABLE 4-3
Power Supply Tolerance
Tolerance
ΝΟΤΕ
Voltages and waveforms given on
the diagrams are
not absolute and may vary sligh tly between instru -
ments.
To
obtain
operating conditions similar
to
those used to
take
these readings, see the first dia-
gram page.
8 . Check
Individual Components . Th e following pro-
cedures describe
methods
of check ing
ind ivid ual com po-
nents in the 453Α . Components wh ich are sold ered in place
are best checked by d isconnecting one end . Th is isolates the
measurement from the effects of surrounding circuitry .
-12 volt
±0.12 volt
Α . T R AN SISTO R S . The best check of transistor oper-
+12 volt
12 .1 volts, ±0.12 volt'
ation is actual performance under o perating cond itions . If α
transistor
is suspected of being defective,
it can best be
+75 volt
±0.75 volt
checked by substituting α new component or one wh ich has
-1960 volt
±58 .5 volts
been checked previously . H owever, be sure that circuit con-
ditions are not such that α replacement transistor might also
'Adju sted for correct ou tput from the Cali brator circuit ; see Cali-
be damaged . If substitute transistors are not availab le, use α
bra τion procedu re .
dynamic tester (such as Tektronix Type 576) . Static-type
testers are not recommend ed , since they do not check oper-
ation under simulated operating conditions
.
F ig . 4-3 provides α guide to aid in locating α defective
circuit . T h is chart may not include check s for all possi ble
defects ; use steps 6-8 in such cases, Start from the top of
Β . DIOD ES . Α d iode can be checked for an open or
the chart and perform the given ch eck s on the left side of
shorted cond ition by
measuring
the
resistance between
the page until α step is found wh ich is not correct . F urther
terminals . Wit h an oh mmeter scale having an internal source
checks and/or
the circuit in wh ich
the trouble is probably
of between 800 millivolts and 3 volts, the resista nce should
located are listed to the right of th is step.
be very h ig h in one direction and very low when the leads
are reversed .
After
the defective
circuit has been
located, proceed
with
ste ps 6
through 8 to
locate
the defective com po-
nent(s) .
Do not use an ohmmeter scale that has α high internal
current. High currents may damage the diode . Do not
6 .
Check
Circuit
Board
Interconnections .
After
the
measure
tunnel diodes
with
an
ohmmeter, use α
trouble has been isolated to α particular circuit, check the
dynamic
tester
(such
as
α
Tek tronix
Type 576
pin connectors on the circuit board for correct connection .
Transistor-Curve Tracer) .
4-6
C . RESISTO R S . Check the resistors with an ohmmeter .
Special Parts .
i n addition to th e standard electronic com-
Check the Electrical Parts L ist for the tolera n ce of the resis-
ponents, some special com ponents are used
in
the 453Α .
tors used in this instrument . Resistors normally do not need
These components are ma nufactured or selected by Tek -
to be replaced unless th e measured value varies widely from
tronix, Inc .
to meet specific performance requirements, or
the specified value .
are manufactured for Tektronix, Inc .
in accordance with
our specifications . Th ese special components are indicated
in the E lectrical Parts L ist by an asterisk preceding the part
D
.
I N D UCTO R S . Ch eck for open inductors b y check ing
number . Most of the mechanical parts used in this instru-
continuity with an o h mmeter . Shorted or partially shorted
ment have been manufactured by Tektronix, Inc . Order all
inductors can usually be found by check ing the waveform
special parts d irectly
from
your
local Tektronix
F ield
response wh en
h igh -freq uency
signals are passed
through
Office or representative .
the circuit . Partial
shorting often reduces h igh-frequency
response (roll-off) .
Ordering Parts . When ord ering replacement parts from
Tek tronix, Inc ., include th e following information :
Ε . CAPACITO R S . Α leaky or shorted capacitor can best
be detected by
checking resistance with an ohmmeter on
1 .
I nstrument type .
the highest scale . Do not exceed the voltage rating of th e
capacitor . The resistance read ing should be high after initial
2 . Instrument serial number .
charge of
the capacitor . An
open capacitor can
best be
d etected with α capacitance meter or by check ing whether
3 . Α description of the part (if electrical, include circuit
the ca pacitor passes AC signals .
number) .
4 . Tektronix Part N umber .
9 . Repair and Readjust the Circuit . If any defective parts
are located, follow the rep lacement procedures given in this
sectio n. Be sure to
check the performance of any circuit
Soldering Tech niques
that has been repaired or that has had any electrical compo-
nents rep laced.
WARNING
General
The reliability and accuracy of this instrument can be
Corrective maintenance consists of component rep lace-
maintained only
if proper
soldering techniq ues are used
ment and instrument repair . Special tech niques required to
when
repairing or replacing parts . General
soldering tech-
replace components in th is instrument are given here .
niques wh ich apply
to maintenance of any precision elec-
tronic equi pment
should be used when work ing on th is
instrument .
Use
only
60/40
rosin-core,
electronic-grade
Obtaining Replacement Parts
solder . The choice of soldering iron
is determined by the
repair to be made . When soldering on circuit boards, use α
Standard Parts . All
electrical
and mechanical part
re-
35- to 40-watt pencil-type soldering iron with an 1/8-inch
placements for
the 453Α
can
be obtained through your
wide, wedge-sha ped ti p. Keep
the tip properly tinned for
local Tektronix F ield Office or
re presentative . H owever,
best heat transfer to
the solder
joint . Α higher wattage
many of
the standard electronic components can be ob-
solderi ng iron may separate the wiring from the base mater-
tai ned locally in
less time than
is
req uired to order them
ial . Avoid excessive heat ; app ly only enough h eat to remove
from Tektronix, Inc . Before purchasing or ordering replace-
the component or to make α good solder joint . Also, apply
ment parts, check the parts list for value, tolerance, rating,
only enough
solder to make
α firm
solder
joint ; do not
and descri ption .
apply too much solder .
Disconnect
the instrument from
the power source
CO RRECTIVE MAI NT ENANCE
before soldering.
NOTE
For
metal
terminals
(e .g .,
switch
terminals,
potenti-
ometers, etc .), α high er wattage-rating soldering iron may be
When selecting replacement parts, it is important to
required . M atch the soldering iron to
the work being done .
remember that the physical size and shape of α com-
For example, if
the component is connected to th e chassis
ponent may affect its performance in the instrument,
or
other
large heat-rad iating
surface,
it
will
require
α
particularly at high frequencies . Α // replacement parts
75-watt or larger sol dering
iron . The pencil-type sold ering
should be direct replacements unless it is known that
iron used on
the circuit boards can be used for soldering to
α
different component
will
not
adversely
affect
switch
terminals,
p otentiometers,
or
metal
terminals
instrument performance .
mou nted in plastic holders .
4-7
L 9 υ
,.
C >
α ή
ύ 4
Ο
2
υ
Οα
ο
Ι
έ
1
d φ
ά
Υ .
ρ φ -
L λ
φ ό.
2` α
α
Ε έ
υ α `ω
d 3
c m ο
_ο α
ύότ
Ν >
d
Ι
οι
ΖΙ
d 5 0
υm
Ο G
ώ > ο m
Ι
ξό Ο
. .
έΙ
ι
~
Ι
C
ου
Ι
ΟΙ
ε
Ι
Ο
Ι
m
ό.
Μ
3, σ
α -
Υ αΟ
φ F
ύ
m
ν
λ
L
d ε
_
> σ
._ ώ
3 οι .ο
ώ ω c
έ χ ο
,°: υ Ζ s
τ ε Ο 3
ε o t:
α
Ν α
ε χ Οα a
υ - Ζ
-_ ε
α 3 Ο ξ
ί Q
Ψ
υ
ξ
.ο
° m
α Ή Ζ m
m υ, Οα
ί F
αΝ =
ά ° ά L
Ι
d Ιρ
°
1 ά
τ
α
υΙσ
°
Ι ό
Ζ L ρ ά
σι
ΟΨ j
Ο
ο F Ψ α λ
Δ έ =
ύ ο Ν
ε m :~ Z
y Ο Δ Ν F
ε
-σ
,Ψυ ~ Ζ
Ο ~3 ο
C φ
> ό έ ο έ
μ
.
Ο
ύ Ο F Q
Ο
σ
Οά
F
τ
υFΝQ
υε
Cσ ~
ό υ
έ 3
ά
Ν Ο
ευ.
Ο
.
C
4 Ε
F
α ε
Ο $
χυΖ
ΟΟ
L F
'3d
Ψ Ν
Δ φ
Οξ ._
%~ ύ
d
d ά
α GΟ
Ο Ο
m α
Ψ
Ό
ΖΟ
Οα
L
α
α
ε
ι
φ έ
ν ο
σF Οα
α .'
> d
ε
Ι
οΙ
Ζ ι
F υ
Ο Ο
>
σ
Υ ό
φ έ
υυ
Ο
ό
ώ m η 7 υ
ο
ο ε
α
_ α ε
ο
° s°
Ομ
υ
t
ρ
~
ε
Υ Ο
G C
; L υ
ε _ > υ
υ
$
ρ
ό
_ Ν ΟΟ =
, η > L 9
έ
s_
C
Ο
ε
ρ
:
.η
*
>
ώ ά ._
C _ ε α -ο
Ι
ε
~ "-
υ
Ο
Δ.~
α
>
υ S υ : ε.
λ
οι
τι
ΥΟ
Ο
ό. d
°Q ά
Υ ν $
σ
ύ
d
-
ατ
ό
ο ; `
Υ Φ
ρ ρ
t 'σ
' φ
U ~ ε
ΟΖ
r λ
ύ αα
Ντ
d
υ 75ο
F
F W
? Υ
φ
Φ L
Νυ
Ι
υ
75σ αΙεα
υ
%~ ? Ψ
ρ 0 α
χ α ` λ
υ
..
α
ο Ζ
ό.
- τ i
L Ο ο
Ψ
F υ
Ο
Ο
Ζ α
? ρε ό
ί
λ
d σ
,υ
α άΨ
Ο
2
Ν
3 m
0 Ν